JP6800905B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that can shift to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

For example, a pachinko gaming machine shifts to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player by winning (passing) a game medium such as a game ball in a predetermined area provided on the game board. Whether or not it is determined, and when a determination result indicating that the transition is made is obtained, the transition to the specific gaming state is performed.

In the specific game state, the variable winning device becomes a winning easy state (open state) as a plurality of advantageous games (round games, etc.), and when the game medium wins the variable winning device in the winning easy state, the game is played against the player. The game value of the medium etc. is given. When a predetermined number (upper limit number of winnings) of game media wins a prize, the variable winning device ends one advantageous game and becomes difficult to win (closed state).

Further, as a conventional game machine of this type, the game value (game medium) in the specific game state is used by using the number of times the advantageous game is executed in the specific game state and the maximum number of winnings in one advantageous game. Etc.) have been proposed to suggest (notify) whether or not (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-27996

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the content to be notified in the specific gaming state is lacking in unexpectedness and variety, and there is a risk that the interest in the specific gaming state cannot be enhanced so much and the content is impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is possible to notify a novel content rich in unexpectedness and variety in a specific gaming state, and by extension, a game that can enhance the interest in the specific gaming state. The purpose is to provide an opportunity.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The gaming machine according to the present invention
Launch means that can launch game media,
A game board having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A passing area through which the game medium can pass and
A displacement member that can be displaced into the first mode in which the game medium can easily pass through the passing region and the second mode in which it becomes difficult
A game medium imparting means capable of imparting a game medium according to the passage of the game medium through the passing region,
A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player based on a predetermined condition, and
When the displacement member is displaced in the second aspect, a passage is formed which has an upper surface connected to one surface of the displacement member and forms a passage through which the game medium can pass by connecting the one surface and the upper surface. Parts and
When the displacement member is displaced in the second aspect, a restraining unit capable of suppressing the traveling speed of the game medium that has reached the passage is provided.
When the displacement member is displaced in the first aspect, the upper surface is not connected to the one surface and at least a part of the passage is not formed, so that the displacement member is displaced in the second aspect. However, it is possible not to suppress the progress speed of the game medium,
When the displacement member is displaced in the first aspect, the game medium can be guided to the passing region.
The specific game includes at least one advantageous game in which the displacement member is displaced to the first aspect.
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a predetermined number of game media have passed through the passing area.
The specific game execution means, in the specific game, the time that the displacement member is in the second aspect, a plurality of specific time to reach to the displacement member is fired a certain number of game media by said firing means It is possible to control the specific time from among the above , and during the plurality of specific times, when the displacement member changes from the second aspect to the first aspect in the specific game, a first number of games are played. A first specific time during which the medium can pass through the passing region and a second specific time during which a second number of gaming media different from the first number can pass through the passing region are included.
The length of one surface of the displacement member is characterized in that the specific number of game media can pass through at the same time.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
Launch means that can launch game media,
A game board having a game area in which the game medium launched by the launching means can roll.
A first passing area provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A second passing area provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A game value-imparting means capable of imparting a game value on condition that the game medium has passed through the second passage area.
A displacement member that can be displaced into the first aspect in which the game medium can easily pass through the second passage area and the second aspect in which the game medium becomes difficult to pass through.
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, the traveling speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first aspect, the progress of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is suppressed. A restraining portion that does not suppress the speed as compared with the case where the displacement member is in the second aspect,
A specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the game medium has passed through the first passage region.
The specific game state control means that can control the specific game state and the specific game state control means that can control the specific game state, provided that the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means.
In the specific game state, the advantageous game executing means capable of executing the advantageous game for displacementing the displacement member to the first aspect at least once is provided.
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a predetermined number of game media have passed through the second passing region.
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media into the displacement member.
In the specific game state, the advantageous game executing means is a specific time during which the displacement member is in the second mode, when a specific number of game media are launched by the launching means and flow into the displacement member. Controllable and
When the displacement member becomes the first aspect after the lapse of the specific time, the game medium flowing into the displacement member passes through the second passage region, so that the game medium passes through the second passage region in the advantageous game. Regarding the number, it is possible to exceed the specified number,
In the specific game state, the number of game values granted by the game value-imparting means and the number of times the advantageous game is executed by the advantageous game execution means per one of the game media that have passed through the second passing region. And the planned grant quantity determining means for determining the planned grant quantity of the game value in the specific game state based on the scheduled number of passages of the game medium that can pass through the second passage region according to the specific time.
It is characterized by including a notification means capable of notifying at least a part of the planned grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means.

According to such a configuration, the number of game values given each time the game medium passes through the second passage area, the number of times the advantageous game is executed, and the displacement member before the execution of the advantageous game are the second aspect. Based on the planned number of passages of the game medium that can pass through the second passage region according to the specific time, the planned number of game values to be granted in the specific game state is obtained, and at least a part of the planned grant quantity. Since the quantity can be notified, it is possible to notify the novel content rich in unexpectedness and variety as to how much game value is given in the specific game state, and by extension, the interest in the specific game state. Can be enhanced.

The gaming machine according to another aspect of the present invention
Launch means that can launch game media,
A game board having a game area in which the game medium launched by the launching means can roll.
A first passing area provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A second passing area provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A game value-imparting means capable of imparting a game value on condition that the game medium has passed through the second passage area.
A displacement member that can be displaced into the first aspect in which the game medium can easily pass through the second passage area and the second aspect in which the game medium becomes difficult to pass through.
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, the traveling speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first aspect, the progress of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is suppressed. A restraining portion that does not suppress the speed as compared with the case where the displacement member is in the second aspect,
A specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the game medium has passed through the first passage region.
The specific game state control means that can control the specific game state and the specific game state control means that can control the specific game state, provided that the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means.
In the specific game state, the advantageous game executing means capable of executing the advantageous game for displacementing the displacement member to the first aspect at least once is provided.
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a predetermined number of game media have passed through the second passing region.
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media into the displacement member.
The advantageous game executing means is the time required for the first number of game media, which is less than the specified number, to be launched by the launching means and pass through the second passing region during the execution of the advantageous game. After the displacement member is set to the first aspect for the first time, the displacement member is displaced to the second aspect, and the sum of the second time, which is the second aspect, with the first number is defined as described above. It is possible to control the time during which a second number of game media exceeding the number is launched by the launching means and flows into the displacement member.
When the displacement member becomes the first aspect after the lapse of the second time, the game medium flowing into the displacement member passes through the second passage region, so that the second passage region in the advantageous game The number of passages can exceed the specified number,
In the specific game state, the number of game values granted by the game value-imparting means and the number of times the advantageous game is executed by the advantageous game execution means per one of the game media that have passed through the second passing region. And, based on the planned number of passages of the game medium that can pass through the second passage region according to the first time and the second time, and the planned grant quantity that determines the planned grant quantity of the game value in the specific game state. Determining means and
It is characterized by including a notification means capable of notifying at least a part of the planned grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means.

According to such a configuration, the number of game values to be given each time the game medium passes through the second pass area, the number of times the advantageous game is executed, and the displacement members are the first and second modes. Based on the planned number of passages of the game medium that can pass through the second passage region according to the first time and the second time, the planned grant quantity of the game value in the specific game state is obtained, and at least in the planned grant quantity. Since it is possible to notify a part of the quantity, it is possible to notify the novel content rich in unexpectedness and variety as to how much game value is given in the specific game state, and by extension, the specific game state. It is possible to enhance the interest in.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
A notification quantity changing means capable of changing the quantity notified by the notification means within the range of the scheduled grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means, and a notification quantity changing means.
With more
The notification means is characterized in that it can notify a part of the planned grant quantity and then notify the quantity changed by the notification quantity changing means.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the further changed quantity even after notifying a part of the planned grant quantity, so that the so-called additional number that the player cannot predict is notified. It is possible to further enhance the interest in a specific game state.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
A third passage area provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A variable member that can be varied into a first mode in which the game medium can easily pass through the third pass region and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult to pass is provided.
The game value giving means can give a game value on condition that the game medium has passed through the third passing area.
The advantageous game execution means is
In the specific gaming state, a first advantageous game executing means capable of executing the first advantageous game that displaces the variable member to the first aspect at least once, and
In the specific gaming state, the second advantageous game executing means capable of executing the second advantageous game that displaces the displacement member to the first aspect at least once is included.
In the specific gaming state, after executing either one of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game, the other can be executed.
The first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means is characterized in that it ends on condition that a predetermined number of game media have passed through the third passing region.

According to such a configuration, for example, the execution of the second advantageous game that may exceed the specified number and the execution of the first advantageous game that may not exceed the specified number can be easily passed through the game medium. It can be easily recognized only by confirming the second passing area and the third passing area.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying novel contents rich in unexpectedness and variety in a specific gaming state, and by extension, enhancing the interest in the specific gaming state.

It is external perspective view of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged perspective view of the main part of the game board in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specifications of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1-round opening and closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the specification of the big prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern selection table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition character selection table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation time management process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before reopening of the big winning opening of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of the big winning opening of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval management process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game end processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interrupt processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit effect pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during a round of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation of the grand prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation of the grand prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing which concerns on the grand prize opening of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the addition bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the addition bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the addition bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the spec of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1-round opening and closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern selection table of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern table of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition character selection table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before reopening of the big winning opening of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of the big winning opening of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval management process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit effect pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect processing of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation of the grand prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation of the grand prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the addition bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1-round opening and closing pattern of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus effect pattern selection table of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the 1st modification of the big prize opening shutter. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation of the big winning opening shutter which concerns on 1st modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation of the big winning opening shutter which concerns on 1st modification. It is a front view which shows the 2nd modification of a game board and a variable winning apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the 3rd modification of the variable winning apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the main part of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 3rd modification. It is an exploded perspective view which shows disassembled the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 3rd modification. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the internal structure of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 3rd modification. It is an exploded perspective view which shows by disassembling the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 3rd modification from another direction. It is a top view which shows the internal structure of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 3rd modification. It is a right side view which shows the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 3rd modification. It is a left side view which shows the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 3rd modification. It is sectional drawing which shows the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 3rd modification. It is sectional drawing which shows the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 3rd modification. It is a perspective view which shows the drive unit of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 3rd modification. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the part of the drive unit of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 3rd modification by disassembling. It is a top view which shows the main part of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 4th modification. It is a front view which shows the main part of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening / closing operation of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 4th modification. It is a top view which shows the main part of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on another example of 4th modification. It is a top view which shows the main part of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on another example of 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening / closing operation of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on another example of 4th modification. It is a top view which shows the main part of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 5th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening / closing operation of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 5th modification. It is a top view which shows the main part of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on another example of 5th modification. It is a top view which shows the main part of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on another example of 5th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening / closing operation of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on another example of 5th modification.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board used in the game machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view of a main part of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

[Structure of game machine]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment has a main body frame base to which a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which a game ball can roll and flow is detachably provided. A main frame 2 having a plate 2a (also referred to as a main frame base) and a front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base) provided with an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) in which the game board 1 can be visually recognized. A front frame 3 rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (on the player side), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing a predetermined effect display (see FIG. 3). Is provided with a detachable rear frame base plate (not shown), and a rear frame (not shown) rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 behind the main body frame 2 (on the anti-player side). I have.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6. The main body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via the main body frame hinge 2b. Note that FIG. 1 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 and the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6. In such a state, the rear frame is , Is not shown because it is housed in the outer frame 6.

The front frame 3 has a front frame base plate 3a and various front frame constituent members provided in the front frame base plate 3a. The front frame constituent members include a protective glass 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right side decorative member 15, left side decorative member 16) and the like. The table frame constituent members are not limited to these, and include all the members that constitute the front frame 3. Further, in the plate unit 8, each cover member (upper plate upper cover 8a, lower plate cover 8b, etc.) is attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

In the front frame 3, a protective glass 7 having transparency is provided in the above-mentioned front frame opening 3h. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3h (window portion) provided in the front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3 from the back surface side (rear side) of the front frame base plate 3a. The front frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 2 so as to face the surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 and cover the surface (front surface) side thereof. In the upper part of the front frame 3, speakers 10a and 10b for producing a sound effect are provided on both upper sides of the front frame opening 3h.

Further, on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3, a decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance is provided so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of the decorative member, a top decoration 14 incorporating a patrol lamp accessory described later is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right sides of the front frame opening 3h. A right side decorative member 15 (for example, an upper right lens 15a, a right middle lens 15b, a right panel cover 15c, etc.) and a left side decorative member 16 (for example, a left outer lens 16a, etc.) that can be changed are provided.

Inside the right-side decorative member 15 and the left-side decorative member 16, light emitting means (for example, a lamp, LED 27, etc.) controlled by a sub-control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6) described later is provided (see FIG. 6). .. The light emitted from the lamp / LED 27 passes through the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16, and is perceived by the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16 as synchrotron radiation or diffused light having an excellent appearance. As a result, the display mode by light can be changed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3, a dish unit 8 is provided below the front frame opening 3h of the front frame base plate 3a. The plate unit 8 includes an upper plate 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and a lower plate 18 provided below the upper plate 17 and capable of storing, for example, game balls overflowing when the upper plate 17 is full. Is provided.

The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing game balls, and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 includes an upper plate main body 17p capable of storing game balls, and an upper plate upper cover 8a detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper portion of the upper plate main body 17p. It is provided with an upper plate decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance of the upper plate 17. As an example of the upper plate decorative member, the upper plate main body 17p is provided with an upper plate left decoration 17a, an upper plate front decoration 17c, and the like so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. Has a shape bent from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a to the lower plate 18 from the middle toward the right side via the front side.

The front frame base plate 3a has a payout port 20 for paying out the game balls to the upper plate 17, and a discharge port for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 to the back side of the front plate base plate 3a (not shown). ) And a supply port 21 for supplying the game ball discharged from the discharge port to the lower plate 18. On the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, there is a ball passage for a game ball to be discharged from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), and a ball passage cover (illustrated) for forming a ball passage by communicating the discharge port and the supply port 21. (Omitted) is provided. When the game ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the game ball is sent to the upper plate 17 through the payout port 20, while the upper plate 17 is so large that the game ball stays near the payout port 20 although the game ball is paid out. When the ball removal button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are moved from the discharge port to the lower plate via the ball passage and the supply port 21. It is sent to 18.

In the present embodiment, the plating member is used for the decoration of the front surface of the game machine, and the plating member 17b is also used for the upper plate front decoration 17c that decorates the front surface portion of the upper plate 17. By using the plated member 17b, the decorative effect of the appearance design of the game machine is enhanced to improve the interest of the player.

The upper plate cover 8a has a ball lending button 23 for receiving a ball lending, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit 84 (see FIG. 6) for lending a game ball (not shown), and the like. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects by the player operating (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game. The arrangement configuration (position, orientation) of the operation unit 9 is not particularly limited, but as an example in the drawing, the push operation button 9A is projected vertically from the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the outer circumference of the push operation button 9A is projected. The operation unit 9 configured to arrange the jog dial 9B is shown in.

Regarding the front frame 3, the portion of the surface (front surface) on the left side (that is, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) from the player side is illegal, for example, a piano wire. It is possible to assume a situation in which a member is invaded and a fraudulent act is performed by the fraudulent member with respect to various configurations constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the portion.

Therefore, in order to prevent such fraudulent activity, a cover member with a wiring holding function (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the front frame 3 at a portion where the above-mentioned fraudulent member invades. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion for holding wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion for covering a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an illegal member such as a piano wire. It is configured by integrating with the fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, since it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function having three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering, and fraud prevention, it is necessary to separately prepare a member for each of these functions. It is possible to reduce the cost by that amount.

The main body frame 2 has a main body frame base plate 2a and various main body frame constituent members provided in the main body frame base plate 2a. The main body frame constituent members include a launching device 26, a speaker 10c, various control boards / relay boards, and the like. The main body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all the members constituting the main body frame 2 are included.

In the main body frame 2, a main body frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball is provided on the lower right side of the main body frame opening.

The launching device 26 includes a panel body 26a for arranging the launching device 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching handle 26b arranged on the front side of the panel body 26a, and a panel body 26a. It is arranged on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the back side of the main body frame, and is provided with a launch drive device (not shown) for launching a game ball.

The lower right side of the front frame 3 is provided with a notch 3p for exposing the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) to the player side. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) is exposed through the notch 3p of the front frame 3 and is adjacent to the dish unit 8 described above. Positioned. Such a launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) and the dish unit 8 exhibit an aesthetic appearance as if they were continuously integrated with each other.

The launch handle 26b is provided with a support portion (not shown), a handle grip 26d rotatably attached to the support portion and rotatable in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions, and a game ball provided in the support portion. A launch stop switch (not shown) that stops the launch of the steering wheel, a launch stop button 26e (also referred to as an operation member) that turns on / off the launch stop switch, and a handle that is arranged so as to cover the opening of the handle grip 26d. It has a cap 26h.

When the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b is rotated in the clockwise direction, the driving force of the launching drive device is increased or decreased according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle), and the driving force at that time is stored in the upper plate 17. The game ball being played is launched at a predetermined timing toward the game area 1p (see FIG. 3) of the game board 1. For example, in the present embodiment, the launch driving device can launch 90.9 game balls per minute, and one game ball can be fired approximately every 0.66 seconds. At this time, when the launch stop button 26e is operated, the launch drive device is stopped and controlled, whereby the launch of the game ball can be stopped.

In the present embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6) controls the operation of the launch stop switch and the launch handle 26b. Inside the launching device 26, a spring member (not shown) for elastically urging the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction is provided, and the player can make the spring member elastic. The game ball is launched by rotating the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction.

When the player interrupts the game and releases the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the starting position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the launch of the game ball is stopped by pressing the launch stop button 26e by the protrusion (not shown) of the handle grip 26d.

As a method of increasing or decreasing the firing intensity of the game ball in the launching device 26, the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) is changed according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b. By changing the power supplied to the launch solenoid (not shown), the launch strength of the game ball is increased or decreased, but as another launch device, it is linked to the rotation operation of the handle grip of the launch handle. A firing spring (not shown) and a gear mechanism for winding (tightening) the firing spring may be provided. In such a launching device, the amount of rotation of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip of the launching handle, and the degree of winding (tightening) of the launching spring is increased or decreased to increase or decrease the degree of winding (tightening) of the launching spring. You can increase or decrease the firing intensity of.

The speaker 10c is provided in the lower center of the main body frame 2 so as to produce a sound effect. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through the speaker cover 10k provided in the portion of the plate unit 8 of the front frame 3 (specifically, the portion between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18). It has become.

The game board 1 is arranged in front of the rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down. doing. The game board 1 is made of a material having translucency (for example, polycarbonate), but may be made of a material having no translucency such as plywood.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 opens and closes the first guide rail 30, the second guide rail 30', the stage 31, the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, and the second starting port 33. Blade member 34, passing gate 35, large winning opening 37, large winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the large winning opening 37, a plurality of general winning openings 40, out opening 41, upper movable effect member 42A, lower movable effect member 42B. , A cover member 43, a liquid crystal display device 4, and an LED unit 5. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a passing area through which the game ball can pass is formed by the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the passing gate 35, the large winning opening 37, and the general winning opening 40. .. The large winning opening shutter 37A is a displacement member that can be displaced into a first mode in which the game ball easily passes through the passing region (large winning opening 37) and a second mode in which the game ball is in a difficult closed state. Equivalent to. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the cover member 43 is removed. The large winning opening 37, the large winning opening shutter 37A, and the cover member 43 are provided as parts or parts constituting the variable winning device.

The first guide rail 30 is arranged so as to extend from the left side toward the game board 1 substantially toward the upper center, and is composed of an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is arranged so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game ball to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is arranged inside the outer rail 30A on the left side of the game board 1. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side thereof.

The second guide rail 30'is arranged so as to extend from the upper right side toward the lower right side toward the game board 1, and is composed of an outer rail 30C and an inner rail 30D. The outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D are for guiding the game ball from the upper right side of the game board 1 to the large winning opening 37 arranged at the lower right side. On the surfaces where the outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D face each other, a plurality of convex portions 30E capable of contacting the game ball flowing down between the outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D are provided at predetermined intervals. There is. As a result, the game ball flowing down through the second guide rail 30'repeatedly contacts the convex portion 30E until it is discharged from the lower end of the second guide rail 30', so that the progress is suppressed and a big prize is won. The traveling speed of the game ball is effectively reduced by the time it reaches the mouth 37. The lower end of the second guide rail 30'is located near the upper right side of the cover member 43 (see FIG. 4). As a result, the game ball released from the lower end of the second guide rail 30'contacts the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43, which will be described later, and then rolls along the upper surface 43a toward the large winning opening 37. And move on. Note that FIG. 3 shows a form in which the convex portions 30E of the outer rail 30C and the convex portions 30E of the inner rail 30D are arranged at equal intervals along the direction of guiding the game ball while facing each other. These convex portions may be arranged in a staggered arrangement at positions offset from each other along the direction of guiding the game ball.

The stage 31 distributes the flowing region of the game ball in the game region 1p, and is arranged along the lower edge portion of the liquid crystal display device 4.

The game ball launched by the launching device 26 flows down toward the lower side of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown) driven into the game board 1 or a stage 31 or the like. In this process, the game ball is collected by winning any of the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the large winning opening 37, and the general winning opening 40, and if no winning is made or the game is passed. If the player does not win a prize after passing through the gate 35, it is discharged from the out port 41 and collected.

In addition, winning means that the game ball passes through the passing area or enters the passing area. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the passing area or enters the passing area, a favorable situation for the player (for example, opening of the second starting port 33, a symbol lottery, a prize ball, etc.) is given. Means. At this time, the passage of the passing area by the game ball means a mere passage, and the entry of the passing area by the game ball means that the game ball is collected separately from the out port 41. Since the winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, passing and entering the ball are substantially synonymous. Therefore, since both the passing of the game ball and the winning of the ball in the passing area lead to the winning, in the following explanation, unless otherwise specified, the "winning" is unified.

When the rotation angle of the launch handle 26b is relatively small, the launching force applied to the game ball is generally small, so that the game ball mainly flows down the left side of the stage 31. Further, when the rotation angle of the launch handle 26b is relatively large, the launching force given to the game ball is generally large, so that the game ball flows down on the right side of the stage 31 or along the second guide rail 30'. .. In general, the method of hitting the game ball to the left side of the stage 31 is called "left-handed hit", and the method of hitting the game ball to flow down to the right side of the stage 31 or along the second guide rail 30'is "". It is called "right-handed".

The first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 give an opportunity for a lottery on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and displays the result of the lottery in the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4. It gives an opportunity to make it happen.

The first starting port 32 is provided at a substantially lower position in the center of the game board 1. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 32, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 via the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 is detected by the first starting port switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

The second starting port 33 is provided directly below the first starting port 32. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 33, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The difficulty of winning the second starting port 33 is determined by the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is detected by the second starting port switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

The blade member 34 opens and closes so as to form a forward leaning posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is in an open state that enables a game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 33 and a second. It is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball in the starting port 33. The blade member 34 is driven by the blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

The ordinary electric accessory is not limited to the one that operates the blade member 34 so as to open and close in the front-rear direction. For example, a so-called electric tulip type that expands the starting port by rotating the game board 1 in the left-right direction. It may be a tongue-shaped member that opens and closes the starting port by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

The passage gate 35 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 33. The winning of the game ball to the passing gate 35 is detected by the passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball wins a prize at the passing gate 35, no prize ball is generated.

The big winning opening 37 is opened when the hit game state (big hit game state, etc.), which is a game state advantageous to the player. The big winning opening 37 is located at the lower right side of the game area 1p, and is provided on the substantially right side of the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33. The position where the large winning opening 37 is arranged is not limited to the above-mentioned position, and can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the game machine and the like.

The large winning opening 37 has an opening having a relatively large size in the left-right direction so that a plurality of game balls can win at the same time. The large winning opening 37 is formed by the large winning opening shutter 37A and the cover member 43. The large winning opening 37 is formed as an opening between the front surface of the game board 1 and the cover member 43 when the large winning opening shutter 37A is in the open state, and is closed when the large winning opening shutter 37A is in the closed state. It becomes.

The large winning opening shutter 37A is a plate-shaped member having a relatively large longitudinal dimension along the left-right direction so as to cover the large winning opening 37. The lateral dimension of the large winning opening shutter 37A is about the diameter of the game ball. The large winning opening shutter 37A is provided so as to be able to protrude and retract in the front-rear direction of the game board 1. The large winning opening shutter 37A is in a closed state in which the large winning opening 37 is closed when it protrudes forward of the game board 1, and is in an open state in which the large winning opening 37 is opened when it is retracted to the rear of the game board 1. .. The upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A has a relatively gentle downward-sloping inclined surface in the closed state. The large winning opening shutter 37A is driven to be opened and closed by the large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

As shown in FIG. 4, the cover member 43 is arranged so as to face the large winning opening shutter 37A. The cover member 43 has an upper surface 43a connected to the closed large winning opening shutter 37A, a front end guide portion 43b, and an opening 43c corresponding to the large winning opening 37. In the state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the upper surface 43a extends from the lower end of the second guide rail 30'to the right end of the large winning opening 37 (opening 43c), and relatively gently descends to the left. Makes a trendy slope. The upper surface 43a is arranged so as to support the plurality of game balls released from the second guide rail 30'and guide them to the large winning opening 37 (opening 43c) located at the left end. The front end guide portion 43b forms an upright wall and is formed so as to extend from the right end of the upper surface 43a to the left end of the large winning opening 37 (opening 43c). On the inner surface of the front end guide portion 43b, a plurality of convex portions 43d that can come into contact with the game ball are provided at predetermined intervals. Further, a plurality of convex portions 1d capable of contacting the game ball are also provided at predetermined intervals on the front suitable portion of the game board 1 facing the front end guide portion 43b. The convex portion 1d of the game board 1 and the convex portion 43d of the cover member 43 are arranged in a staggered arrangement at positions shifted from each other along the traveling direction of the game ball. As a result, the game ball rolling along the upper surface 43a and the front end guide portion 43b repeatedly and alternately abuts on the convex portions 1d and 43d while moving to the left end of the large winning opening 37 (large winning opening shutter 37A). The progress is suppressed, and the speed of the game ball is effectively slowed down by the time it passes through the large winning opening 37 (large winning opening shutter 37A). Such an upper surface 43a, a large winning opening shutter 37A, and a front end guide portion 43b form a passage through which a game ball can flow in when the large winning opening shutter 37A is in a closed state, and suppress the progress of the inflowing game ball. A restraining portion 430 is formed. In a state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the opening 43c is arranged at a position corresponding to the large winning opening shutter 37A to form the large winning opening 37. At the location of the game board 1 located inside the cover member 43, a ball passage (not shown) for collecting the game balls and a large winning opening count switch 370 are provided. The game ball that has fallen from the large winning opening 37 in the open state is guided to the large winning opening count switch 370 through the ball passage, and is detected as a winning by the large winning opening count switch 370. In addition, the detailed configuration and operation of the large winning opening 37 will be described later.

One or more general winning openings 40 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 40, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), although the lottery is not performed. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 40 is detected by the general winning opening switches 400A and 400B.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, as the normal gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 60 described later, the non-probability / non-time saving gaming state and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery are non-probability / non-probability. There are a probabilistic game state (special game state) in which the probability is higher than the non-time-saving game state, and a time-saving game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non-probability / non-time-saving game state. If the lottery is won, the game shifts to the jackpot game state (specific game state).

In the time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is high, so that the support of the blade member 34 as a normal electric throwing facilitates the winning of the second starting port 33. This state is a so-called "electric support" state, in which the reserved balls of the special symbol game described later can be easily accumulated, and the loss of the game balls can be suppressed by winning the second starting port 33. Specifically, the time-saving game state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time-saving game state 1), and a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (time-saving game state 2). ), It means at least one of the states (time saving game state 3) in which the opening time of the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory is relatively long. For example, the time-saving game state also includes a state in which the time-saving game state 1, the time-saving game state 2, and the time-saving game state 3 proceed simultaneously in any combination. In such a time-saving game state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit game state is improved.

In the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the game always shifts to the probabilistic / short-time gaming state (the probable-changing gaming state and the normal gaming state which is the short-time gaming state), and the non-probable / non-short-time gaming state (non-probable changing gaming state). Therefore, the game does not shift to the normal game state, which is a non-time saving game state. On the other hand, if the number of symbol fluctuations (number of games) of the special symbol game reaches a predetermined number without shifting to the jackpot game state in the probabilistic / short-time game state, the normal game is in the non-probable change game state and the non-time-saving game state. It is designed to shift to the state.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit game state, 10 special symbol lottery (10 times change display or stop display of special symbol) is performed in the probability change / time saving game state. In addition, it shifts to a non-probability change / non-time saving game state. After the end of the big hit game state, the probability change / time saving game state may be maintained until the next big hit game state is entered. In the following description, a probabilistic gaming state that ends by performing a predetermined number of special symbol lottery as in the present embodiment is also described as an ST (Specia1 Time) gaming state.

The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B are in a state of being retracted behind the game board 1 when not operating, and appear in front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 when performing a specific effect. It is located in. The upper movable effect member 42A appears in front of the central portion of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and performs a rotational operation and light emission. The lower movable effect member 42B appears in front of the lower part of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and emits light.

The LED unit 5 notifies the player of each game state and lottery result, and as shown in FIG. 5, the normal symbol display unit 51, the ordinary symbol hold display unit 52, the first special symbol display unit 53, and the first 2. It has a special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol reservation display unit 55, a second special symbol reservation display unit 56, and a round display unit 59. Although not shown in particular, the lamps and LEDs 27 (see FIG. 6) arranged on the game board 1 and the like include those corresponding to the character appearance notification lamps, and the transition to the jackpot game state is confirmed. It is designed to light (or blink) when a part of the special symbol fluctuates in the game state or when an additional character described later appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 during the big hit game state.

The ordinary symbol display unit 51 drives the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory when the game ball wins a prize in the passing gate 35, and determines whether or not to open the second starting port 33. The lottery result for "game" is displayed. The normal symbol display unit 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 can be lit in red and blue, for example, and is lit in red in the case of winning in the normal symbol game, while it is lit in blue in the case of loss in the normal symbol game. When the lighting mode of the LED lamp 511 on the normal symbol display unit 51 is, for example, a red lighting mode, the blade member 34 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 33 is allowed to win the game ball. The lighting mode according to the winning and losing of the normal symbol game may be another lighting mode. For example, in the case of winning, the lighting state or blinking state is set, while in the case of losing, the lighting mode is turned off. You may do it.

In the normal symbol hold display unit 52, a new game ball wins a prize in the passing gate 35 while the normal symbol display unit 51 is performing variable display by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524. If this is the case, the number of times that the variation display of the normal symbol that is reserved for the next and subsequent variation display by the normal symbol display unit 51 can be performed is displayed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524 are located on the left side of the normal symbol display unit 51, and are arranged side by side in a row together with the LED lamps 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524, for example, when the number of holds is "1", the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523, 524 are turned off. When the number of holds is "2", the LED lamps 521 and 522 are turned on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of holds is "3", the LED lamps 521, 522, 523 are turned on and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of holdings is "4", all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524 are lit.

The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 show the result of a winning lottery for the "special symbol game", and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “first special symbol”) as identification information when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 32, and the first The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting port 32 is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol related to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "second special symbol") that serves as identification information when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 33, and also displays the second. The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting port 33 is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol related to the second special symbol.

The variation display of the symbol by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed by, for example, using a 7-segment LED or the like and repeatedly turning on / off each segment individually. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (symbol) formed by turning on / off each segment of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. At this time, the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the first special symbol and the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the second special symbol have different modes. The hit symbol of the first special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and there is a nominal jackpot symbol such as "probability variation 1" indicating that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state is performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. (See FIG. 7). The winning symbol of the second special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and is nominal such as "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" indicating that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state is performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. There is a big hit symbol of No. 1 and a nominal small hit symbol such as "small hit" that triggers the transition to the so-called small hit game state (see FIG. 7). That is, the hit symbol of the first special symbol does not have the small hit symbol that triggers the transition to the small hit game state, and the hit symbol of the second special symbol has the small hit that triggers the transition to the small hit game state. There is a design. The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 are not limited to the 7-segment LED and the like, and may be, for example, a combination of lighting and extinguishing of two or more LED lamps.

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551,552,553,554, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is turned on or off by turning on or off these LED lamps 551,552,553,554. Or, for the variation display of the first special symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games when a new game ball is won in the first start port 32 while the second special symbol display unit 54 is displaying the variation of the symbol for the special symbol game. Displays the number of times (the number of holds) that the variation display of the first special symbol display unit 53 held in can be executed. The second special symbol holding display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is turned on or off by turning on or off these LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564. Alternatively, when the second special symbol display unit 54 wins a new game ball in the second starting port 33 during the variable display of the symbol for the special symbol game, it is reserved for the variable display of the symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games. The number of times the variable display of the second special symbol display unit 54 can be executed (number of holds) is displayed. Each of the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56 is arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and is located above the normal symbol reservation display unit 52. The display mode of the number of holds on the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the number of holds on the normal symbol hold display unit 52.

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 and the second special symbol holding display unit 56 move to the first starting port 32 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variable-displaying. The game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the ball passage or the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port 33. If so, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. When the symbol that has been variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the reserved first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is started.

Here, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first start port 32 and the first 2. The maximum number of pending variable displays of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 due to the winning of the game ball to the starting port 33 is four. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is stored in the main RAM 63 (FIG. The information of the first special symbol game for four times stored and held as the start storage (start storage information) in the first special symbol start storage area (0) of 6) is the first special symbol start storage area (see 6). 1) -The first special symbol start storage area (4) is stored as a start memory. Similarly, when the second special symbol game is held for four times, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 ( The information of the second special symbol game for four times stored as the start memory in 0) is stored as the start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). Be remembered. Therefore, the maximum number of winning prizes held in both the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, that is, the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, is eight in total.

In addition, in place of the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, or in addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, the liquid crystal display device 4 , The hold of winning a prize at the first starting port 32 and the holding of winning a prize at the second starting port 33 may be displayed.

The round display unit 59 lights up while the hit symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of times related to the round game (round game) described later when the jackpot game state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591,592,593, and indicates the number of rounds when the jackpot game state is executed by turning on or off these LED lamps 591,592,593. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds is basically defined as 16 rounds (hereinafter, may be referred to as "16R"). In this case, the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592 and 593 are turned off. To do. The number of rounds (number of times) may mean the entire number of times the round game (round game) is executed, or may mean the number of orders indicating the order when the round games are sequentially executed. Regarding the number of rounds, when the former is meant, for example, "16 rounds" or "16R" is described, and when the latter is meant, for example, "16th round" or "16Rth" is described. Further, in the following description, the "round game" may be simply referred to as a "round".

As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 4 is arranged behind the game board 1, and a display area 4A is arranged substantially in the center thereof so that the player can see it. In addition to the result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 32 and the second starting port 33, various images related to the game, for example, an identification symbol for production, a production image in the normal game state, and a production in the big hit game state. It displays images, production images for demo display, and the like. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 is adapted to display the identification information in a variable manner on the condition that the game ball wins the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 33. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes a display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 constitute the notification means.

[Electrical configuration of game machines]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 6, the “switch” is abbreviated as “SW” and the “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for controlling the game and a sub-control circuit 70 as a sub-control means for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game. Have.

The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 as a read-only memory, a main RAM 63 as a read / write memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I / O port 65, a command output port 66 as a command transmission means, and a backup capacitor 67. It has. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 62.

A first start port switch 320 arranged behind the first start port 32 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

A second start port switch 330 arranged behind the second start port 33 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

These first start port switch 320 and second start port switch 330 give a predetermined detection signal as a prize when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first start port 32 and the second start port 33. It is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

A passing gate switch 350 arranged behind the passing gate 35 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When a game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 350, it is assumed that the game ball has won a prize in the passing gate 35, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of this ordinary symbol lottery is displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 51, an effect image for the player to grasp that the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is won is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may do so.

The passing gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that it has won a prize when it detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 35. As a result, the passing gate switch 350 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 33.

The general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B arranged behind the general winning opening 40 located on the left and right sides of the game board 1 are connected to the main control circuit 60. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, a preset number of winning balls are performed by the payout device 83.

A large winning opening count switch 370 arranged below the large winning opening 37 is connected to the main control circuit 60. The large winning opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening 37. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370, the payout device 83 uses a preset number of game balls as prize balls and passes through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate. Pay out to the plate 18. The large winning opening count switch 370 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 when the game ball passes through the large winning opening 37.

The main control circuit 60 controls the large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A for driving the large winning opening shutter 37A that opens and closes the large winning opening 37. As a result, the large winning opening shutter 37A is driven so as to change between an open state in which the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 37 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. In such an open drive of the big winning opening 37 by the big winning opening shutter 37A, the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54, and the big hit game state is entered. It is done when it is migrated.

The main control circuit 60 controls the blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode on the normal symbol display unit 51, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 33. It will be easier.

For example, in the normal symbol game of the present embodiment, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the game state (“non-probability variation / non-time saving game state” in the present embodiment) that is not the time saving game state is 0/257, and the blade member 34 Will not be released. On the other hand, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving game state) is, for example, 257/257, and when this is won, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. Further, in the normal symbol game, the number of normal symbols that are the winning symbols is one, and the winning count number that is the upper limit when the second starting port 33 is opened is 10 counts (10).

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 is the first when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variable-displaying. 1 First based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being variablely displayed is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of pending executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol, that is, the number of pending cases related to the first special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been held as the number of reserved symbols related to the first special symbol is started.

The second special symbol holding display unit 56 is the second when the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330 while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variable-displaying. 1 The second based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of pending executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol, that is, the number of pending cases related to the second special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been held as the number of reserved symbols related to the second special symbol is started.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the priority of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. .. Therefore, the corresponding first special symbol and the second special symbol may be variably displayed in the order of winning in the order of winning the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33.

Further, as described above, an upper limit is set for the number of holds on which the execution of the variable display of the special symbol is held, and in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 is set in the first start port 32 and the second start port 33. When the game ball wins and the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330, the maximum number of hold numbers for the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four, respectively. (That is, the number of detections is 4), and the 5th and subsequent ones are not stored as the number of holds. At this time, when the number of holdings decreases due to the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the number of holdings is added again up to 4 pieces.

When the number of the first special symbol games held in the first special symbol display unit 53 is, for example, up to four, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is the information of the main RAM 63. 1 Special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as a start memory, and thereafter, the information of the special symbol game for which the number of reservations is 4 is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63. It is sequentially stored as a start memory.

Similarly, for the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of reserved second special symbol games is, for example, up to four, the second special symbol display unit 54 corresponding to the changing second special symbol display unit 54. The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored as the start storage in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and thereafter, the information of the second special symbol game for which the number of reservations is 4 is the second special symbol game of the main RAM 63. 2 The special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored as start memory.

Therefore, the total number of game balls held for the special symbol game associated with winning the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 is a maximum of eight, and the first special symbol holding display unit 54 and the second special symbol are held. The number of hold displays by LEDs 551 to 554 and LEDs 561 to 564 of the hold display unit 55 is also four, respectively.

In the open state of the large winning opening 37 by the large winning opening shutter 37A, the count value (the number of winnings of the game ball) by the large winning opening count switch 370 becomes a predetermined number (the number of winnings is one in this embodiment), or in advance. It is maintained until one of the conditions is satisfied, such as the expiration of the specified opening time described later. When the number of winnings of the game ball reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the large winning opening shutter 37A has elapsed, the large winning opening shutter 37A is driven to close the large winning opening 37.

In the big hit game state, the open state and the closed state of the big prize opening 37 are repeated based on a preset large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. In the big hit game state, the game in which the big winning opening 37 is opened and closed a plurality of times based on the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later is called a "round game (round game)". A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. The state from when the big winning opening 37 is closed by one round game until when the big winning opening 37 is opened as the next round game is referred to as "inter-round game" or "inter-round interval". Also called simply "interval". In the present embodiment, the large winning opening 37 is opened and closed only once in one round, but in another example, the large winning opening 37 is opened a plurality of times in one round. And it may be closed. Further, when a plurality of large winning openings are provided, it is possible to exclusively control the open / closed state of the plurality of large winning openings in one round. That is, in one round, while one of the large winning openings is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the remaining large winning openings are continuously closed.

The pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a so-called small hit gaming state as a gaming state having a property different from that of the big hit gaming state. Unlike the big hit game state, the small hit game state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and in the small hit game state of the present embodiment, the big winning opening 37 is defined to be open only once. .. Of course, in the small hit game state, any or specific large winning openings may be controlled to be repeatedly opened a plurality of times. This small hit game state is a game state in which the small hit is won by a special symbol lottery. The gaming state basically does not change before and after the transition to the small hit gaming state. For example, when a small hit is won in a non-probable variable game state and the game shifts to the small hit game state, the game state after the end of the small hit game state remains the non-probable variable game state before the transition to the small hit game state. Therefore, it does not shift to the probabilistic gaming state. Similarly, when a small hit is won in the probabilistic game state and the game shifts to the small hit game state, the game state after the end of the small hit game state is the small hit game state as long as the number of games in the probabilistic game state remains. It remains in the probabilistic gaming state before shifting to, and does not shift to the non-probability changing gaming state.

Round games are counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round game may be referred to as a second round. In the following description (including drawings referred to in the description), the "round" with numbers such as the first round or the first round is simply "R" such as 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R, etc. ] May be omitted. In one round game, when the large winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, or when the specified number of winnings per round is reached before the opening state is reached. Will close the big winning opening, and the round game will be terminated without opening the big winning opening for the remaining number of opening times.

In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. For example, in the variable display of the special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is composed of numbers except in a specific case. Symbols (decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as "0", "1", "2" ... "7" are displayed in three columns.

On the other hand, when the special symbol that has been variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Further, in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, when the fluctuated or stopped special symbol has a specific stop display mode, the player is made to understand that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Specifically, in either the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54, the special symbol is displayed in a specific display mode corresponding to, for example, a "big hit" in which many balls can be obtained. When the display is stopped, the combination of decorative symbols for effect displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is in a specific display mode (for example, a state in which all the same symbols are aligned in each of a plurality of symbol rows). In addition, the effect image for a big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

A specific example of the control of the main CPU 61 described above will be described later.

The main ROM 62 stores a program for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes described later and various tables.

The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, values of variables, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, another readable / writable storage medium may be used instead of the main RAM 63.

The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

The I / O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61 and output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub-control circuit 70.

The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by promptly supplying power to the main RAM 63 at the time of power failure.

Various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, a blade member solenoid 340, and an external terminal plate 80.

The external terminal board 80 is located between a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk and displaying the number of big hits, or an external device such as a hall computer 100 that manages a plurality of pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall. It is for data communication with.

Various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first start port switch 320, a second start port switch 330, a passing gate switch 350, a large winning opening count switch 370, a general winning opening left switch 400A, and a general winning opening. The right switch 400B and the backup clear switch 81 are included.

The backup clear switch 81 clears the backup data of the main control circuit 60 and the payout / launch control circuit 82, which will be described later, in response to the operation of the hall manager when the power is cut off.

Further, the launching device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected to the main control circuit 60 via the payout / launch control circuit 82.

The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / launch control circuit 82. The payout / launch control circuit 82 mainly controls the launch device 26 and the payout device 83, and the launch device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected to each other. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 realize the game value adding means.

The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal requesting the lending of a game ball according to the operation of the player, and can transmit and receive a signal to and from the ball lending operation panel 85. ..

The payout / launch control circuit 82 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. This causes the payout device 83 to pay out the game ball. For example, the payout device 83 pays out three game balls as the number of prize balls per winning to the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 33, and as the number of prize balls per winning to the general winning opening 40. Ten game balls are paid out, and 15 game balls are paid out as the number of prize balls for each prize in the large winning opening 37.

The payout / launch control circuit 82 is a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the launch handle 26b of the launch device 26 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction. Is supplied with power to control the game ball to be launched toward the game area 1p.

The main CPU 61 interrupts the main process and executes the timer interrupt process as the interrupt process even during the execution of the main process described later. The timer interrupt process is executed triggered by an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60, and is configured so that commands are supplied from the main control circuit 60.

The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and is a sub CPU 71, a program ROM 72, a work RAM 73, a command input port 74, a backup capacitor 75, and display control. It has a circuit 76, a voice control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect device control circuit 79. A liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. Speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are connected to the voice control circuit 77. A lamp / LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is connected to a movable effect device 42 including a motor and a mechanism for driving the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B.

Further, in the sub-control circuit 70, the push-button switch 90A provided on the push-button 9A is connected, and the jog dial switch 90B provided on the jog dial 9B is connected. The push-button switch 90A detects the operation of the push-button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B identifies the rotation direction and rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. A push-button switch 90A supplies a push-button switch 90A to the sub-control circuit 70, and a rotation operation signal is supplied from the jog dial switch 90B.

The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display means. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60.

A specific example of the control of the sub CPU 71 described above will be described later.

The program ROM 72 stores a program and various tables for the sub CPU 71 to mainly control various effects.

The work RAM 73 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 and transmits them to the sub CPU 71.

The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by promptly supplying power to the work RAM 73 at the time of power failure.

The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 71, for example, for generating various image data with an image data processor (VDP). It is composed of an image data ROM that stores data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A converter that converts image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The image data includes, for example, decorative pattern image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraudulent notification image data, and the like.

Further, the display control circuit 76 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. An image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

The voice control circuit 77 is for controlling voices generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. For example, a sound source IC that controls voices, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, and a voice signal. Includes an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying. The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

The sound source IC controls the voice generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and one from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Voice data can be selected.

Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the audio signal to the amplifier. It should be noted that this amplifier amplifies the audio signal and generates audio from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c.

The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling a lamp / LED 27 including a decorative lamp, a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. It is composed of. The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

The movable effect device control circuit 79 operates (swings) the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B by operating the pressing operation button 9A or the like during the valid period of the operation on the operation unit 9, for example, in the jackpot gaming state. Etc.) to control the production operation.

[Game machine specifications]
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, specifications relating to the gaming characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the jackpot gaming state is 1 / 99.75 (657/65536) at the time of low probability (non-probability variable gaming state), which is a high probability. At the time (probability change game state), it is 1 / 13.05 (5020/65536). The small hit probability of the special symbol in the small hit game state is 1 / 29.92 (2190/65536) in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. As for the digestion order of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery by the second special symbol is prioritized for digestion. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation game state), the ST game state in which the probability variation game state continues up to 10 times as the number of games (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) is implemented.

The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the big hit symbol "probability change 1" of the first special symbol, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) becomes the winning pattern 1, and the number of rounds of the round game is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds that can easily win the big winning opening is 7R) is given, and the bonus name indicating the production mode of the jackpot game state is "normal bonus", and the bonus content is "7R bonus". In this "normal bonus", the estimated number of winnings in the 1st to 7th rounds is 1 and the estimated number of winnings in the 8th to 16th rounds is 0 for winning the large winning opening 37. As a result, in the "normal bonus", the planned number of prize balls is 105. The probability (rush rate) of "probability variation 1" as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is set to 100/100. In the present embodiment, the “bonus” means a notification effect related to the number of prize balls.

In the big hit symbol "Probability change 1" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 2, the number of rounds is 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "Big addition bonus", and the bonus content is "Big addition". It is a "bonus". In the "large addition bonus", the estimated number of winnings in the 1st to 7th rounds is 1 and the estimated number of winnings in the 8th to 16th rounds is 4 for winning the prize in the large winning opening 37. As a result, the planned number of prize balls is 645 in the "large addition bonus". The probability (rush rate) of "probability variation 1" as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is set to 35/100.

In the jackpot symbol "Probability 2" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 3, the number of rounds is 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "Middle addition bonus 1", and the bonus content is "Medium". It is an additional bonus 1 ". In the "middle addition bonus 1", the estimated number of winnings in the 1st to 7th rounds is 1 and the estimated number of winnings in the 8th to 16th rounds is 3 for winning the large winning opening 37. As a result, the planned number of prize balls is 510 in the "Middle addition bonus 1". The probability (rush rate) of "probability variation 2" as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is set to 20/100.

In the jackpot symbol "Probability 3" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 4, the number of rounds is 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "Middle addition bonus 2", and the bonus content is "Medium". It is an additional bonus 2 ". "Medium-addition bonus 2" is an estimated number of 1R to 7R prizes, 2 estimated number of 8R and 9R prizes, and 10R and 11R prizes for winning the large prize opening 37. The number of winnings is 3, the estimated number of winnings at the 12th R is 1, and the estimated number of winnings at the 13th to 16Rs is 4. As a result, the planned number of prize balls is 510 in the "Middle addition bonus 2". The probability (rush rate) of "probability variation 3" as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

In the big hit symbol "probability change 4" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 5, the number of rounds is 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "small addition bonus 1", and the bonus content is "small". It is an additional bonus 1 ". In the "small addition bonus 1", the estimated number of winnings in the 1st to 7th rounds is 1 and the estimated number of winnings in the 8th to 16th rounds is 2 for winning the large winning opening 37. As a result, the planned number of prize balls is 375 in the "small addition bonus 1". The probability (rush rate) of "probability variation 4" as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is set to 15/100.

In the big hit symbol "Probability 5" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 6, the number of rounds is 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "Small addition bonus 2", and the production content is "Small". It is an additional bonus 2 ". In the "small addition bonus 2", the estimated number of winnings in the 1st to 13th rounds is 1 and the estimated number of winnings in the 14th to 16th rounds is 4 for winning the large winning opening 37. As a result, the planned number of prize balls is 375 in the "small addition bonus 2". The probability (rush rate) of "probability variation 5" as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

In the big hit symbol "Probability change 6" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 7, the number of rounds is 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "no addition bonus", and the bonus content is "no addition". It is a "bonus". In the "non-addition bonus", the estimated number of winnings in the 1st to 16th rounds is one for winning the large winning opening 37. As a result, the planned number of prize balls is 240 in the "no addition bonus". The probability (rush rate) of "probability variation 6" as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

In the small hit symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 8, and the bonus name and bonus content are "small hit". The inrush rate of the small hit symbol is set to 100/100. In the small hit game state, unlike the big hit game state, there is no concept of a round game, so the number of rounds is not specified.

The large winning opening count number corresponds to the specified winning number that triggers the opening state to the closed state of the large winning opening 37 in one round, and in the present embodiment, the large winning opening count number (specified winning number). Is set to "1". That is, when one prize is counted in the large winning opening 37 in one round, the large winning opening 37 is changed from the open state to the closed state. It should be noted that the number of large prize openings (specified number of prizes) does not set the upper limit of the number of prizes in one round. That is, even if a prize exceeding the number of large prize openings is detected during one round, the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prizes is paid out. As a result, it is possible to over-win a prize that exceeds the number of large prize openings. This point will be described later.

The time saving performance (specification of the time saving game state) is set so that the time saving game state continues during a high probability (while in the probability variation game state). The number of prize balls is 3 for each winning opening (1st starting opening 32 and 2nd starting opening 33), 10 for each winning entry to the general winning opening 40, and to the large winning opening 37. It is set to be 15 per prize. The hit probability of a normal symbol is set to be 0/257 when the probability is low and 257/257 when the probability is high. The number of hit symbols of a normal symbol is set to one. The number of winning counts when the second starting port 33 is opened is set to count up to 10 as an upper limit.

The specifications may have the following contents. For example, for special symbols, the jackpot probability at low probability and high probability is not limited to the above. That is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be such that the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high probability than in the low probability. The small hit probability is not limited to the above. For example, it may be a specification in which the winning probability of the other special symbol is higher than that of one special symbol. Regarding the digestion order of the special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be set in the winning order without setting the priority order, or the first special symbol may be preferentially digested. The number of STs in which the probabilistic gaming state (ST gaming state) continues is not limited to the above. In addition, the probabilistic game state may continue until the next big hit. The number of rounds is not limited to the above, and a number of rounds other than 16R may be provided. The actual number of rounds may be the same as the number of regular rounds. The type of jackpot symbol is not limited to the above. For example, the types of jackpot symbols of the first special symbol may be increased. Further, the additional bonus may be executed even in the big hit game state based on the first special symbol. In the present embodiment, the number of large winning openings (specified number of winnings) is set to "1", but the number is not limited to this. For example, the number of large winning openings may be set to 2 or more. In such a case, it is desirable to provide a large winning opening shutter or the like that allows more game balls to pass at the same time than the number of large winning opening counts. The time saving performance may be larger than the number of STs (the number of games in the probabilistic game state), or may be less than the number of STs including, for example, 0 times. The number of prize balls is not limited to those described above. For example, if the number of prize balls related to the large prize opening is set to a value different from the above, the planned number of prize balls is calculated using the value and the estimated number of prizes, and the number of additional prizes described later is notified. Can be done. With respect to ordinary symbols, the hit probabilities at low probability and high probability are not limited to those described above. For example, the winning probability of a normal symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win at a high probability than at a low probability, and for example, it may be won at a low probability. The number of hit symbols of ordinary symbols is not limited to those described above, and may be, for example, two or more. In the case of two or more, it is preferable that the opening patterns of the blade members are associated with each other so as to be different. The winning count number of the second starting port may be a value other than those described above.

[1 round opening / closing pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening in one round will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8, three types of opening / closing patterns A to C are defined as one-round opening / closing patterns (one-round opening / closing patterns) for the large winning opening 37. The opening / closing patterns A to C are opening / closing patterns corresponding to the big hit gaming state, and the opening / closing pattern C among them is an opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit gaming state. The opening / closing pattern C in the small hit game state is not defined as one round, but is shown as an opening / closing pattern for one round for convenience. The opening / closing patterns A to C shown in FIG. 8 are merely examples, and the number of types and the specific time for defining the opening / closing pattern may be other than those shown in the drawings.

The opening / closing pattern A is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state continues for 10 seconds. The opening / closing pattern A is defined as a round section from the first opening state to the final closing state. Similarly, in the other opening / closing patterns B and C, the round section is defined as the period from the first opening state to the final closing state. In the section where the open state is 10 s, the open state of the large winning opening 37 is a relatively long long open. That is, in the opening / closing pattern A, the long opening occurs once, and the opening time of the opening / closing pattern A is 10 s.

The opening / closing pattern B is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state continues for 5 seconds. The opening / closing pattern B is defined as a round section from the first opening state to the final closing state. In the section where the open state is 5 s, the open state of the large winning opening 37 is the middle open which is shorter than the long open. That is, in the opening / closing pattern B, the middle opening occurs once, and the opening time of the opening / closing pattern B is 5 s.

The opening / closing pattern C is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is only 0.1 s. The section where the open state is 0.1 s is a short open that is considerably shorter than the middle open. That is, the opening / closing pattern C is such that the short opening occurs only once, and the opening time of the opening / closing pattern C is 0.1 s.

In the real round game in the jackpot game state, among the above-mentioned opening / closing patterns A to C, the round game when the opening / closing is controlled based on the opening / closing patterns A and B including the long opening or the middle opening in which the game ball can be won. Applicable. The round game when the opening / closing is controlled based on the opening / closing pattern C is a non-substantial round game that does not correspond to the real round game.

The opening / closing pattern for one round may have the following contents. The opening pattern is not limited to the above three types, and may be two or less types or four or more types. Further, regarding the opening / closing pattern A, the opening time may not be 10s but may be, for example, less than 10s or more than 10s, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can win a prize. Further, it may be opened a plurality of times instead of opening only once in one round. Regarding the opening / closing pattern B, the opening time may be, for example, less than 5s or more than 5s instead of 5s, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can win a prize. Further, it may be opened a plurality of times instead of opening only once in one round. Further, the opening / closing pattern A and the opening / closing pattern B may have the same opening time, or the opening / closing pattern B may have a longer opening time than the opening / closing pattern A. Regarding the opening / closing pattern C, the opening time may not be 0.1 s, but may be, for example, less than 0.1 s or more than 0.1 s. Further, it may be opened a plurality of times instead of opening only once in one round.

[Large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit game state and the small hit game state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 8 are defined as the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern). The winning pattern 1 is generated at the time of the normal bonus, and the number of rounds specified for the round to be opened (hereinafter referred to as "specified number of rounds") and the long opening or middle that allows the winning to the large winning opening 37 The actual number of rounds defined only for the rounds including at least the opening is the hit pattern defined as 7R. In addition, the interval between rounds starts immediately after the game ball of the specified number of winnings (1) is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370 in one round, and the large winnings are first opened in the next round. This corresponds to a section in which the mouth 37 is closed. The interval between rounds may be started immediately after the big winning opening 37 is completely closed in one round. As shown in the figure, as the pattern of the interval between rounds, the interval pattern a in which the closing time (closing time) is 0.3s, the interval pattern b in which the closing time is 1.65s, and the interval pattern in which the closing time is 2.31s. An interval pattern d such that c and 2.97 s is defined. In the hit pattern 1, the interval between all rounds is the interval pattern a, and the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st to 7th rounds, and the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 8th to 16th rounds. It is specified to have an opening / closing pattern C. That is, the hit pattern 1 stipulates that the actual rounds are the 7 rounds of the 1st to 7th rounds, and the remaining 9 rounds of the 8th to 16th rounds are executed as non-substantial rounds.

The hit pattern 2 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of a large addition bonus and the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are defined as 16R. In the hit pattern 2, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1st round to the start of the 7th round is the interval pattern a, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 7th round to the start of the 16th round is the interval pattern d, and the 1st to 16th rounds are It is stipulated that the large winning opening 37 has an opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the large addition bonus that is executed as a production together with the winning pattern 2, the number of prize balls based only on the number of large prize openings (specified number of prizes: 1) is 240, but the planned number of prize balls including over prizes is Since it becomes 645, a number (405) corresponding to these differences is notified as an additional number in the first half round (1R to 7R rounds).

The hit pattern 3 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the medium addition bonus 1 and the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are defined as 16R. In the hit pattern 3, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1st round to the start of the 7th round is the interval pattern a, and the interval between the rounds from the end of the 7th round to the start of the 16th round is the interval pattern c. It is stipulated that the large winning opening 37 has an opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the medium addition bonus 1 executed as a production together with the hit pattern 3, the number of prize balls based on the specified number of prizes is 240, but the planned number of prize balls including the over prize is 510, so it corresponds to these differences. The number (270) to be added is notified as an additional number in the first half round.

The hit pattern 4 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the medium addition bonus 2 and the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are defined as 16R. In the hit pattern 4, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1st round to the start of the 7th round is the interval pattern a, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 7th round to the start of the 9th round is the interval pattern b, and the interval from the end of the 9th round to the start of the 11th round. The inter-round interval is the interval pattern c, the inter-round interval between the 11th and 12th rounds is the interval pattern a, the inter-round interval from the end of the 12th R to the start of the 16th round is the interval pattern d, and the 1st to 16th rounds are It is stipulated that the big winning opening 37 has an opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the middle addition bonus 2 executed as a production together with the hit pattern 4, the number (270) corresponding to the difference between the number of prize balls (240) and the planned number of prize balls (510) is the second half round (rounds after the 8th round). Will be notified as an additional number.

The hit pattern 5 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the small addition bonus 1 and the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are defined as 16R. In the hit pattern 5, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1st round to the start of the 7th round is the interval pattern a, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 7th round to the start of the 16th round is the interval pattern b, and the 1st to 16th rounds are It is stipulated that the large winning opening 37 has an opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the small addition bonus 1 executed as a production together with the hit pattern 5, the number of prize balls based on the specified number of prizes is 240, but the planned number of prize balls including the over prize is 375, so it corresponds to these differences. The number (135) to be added is notified as an additional number in the first half round.

The hit pattern 6 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the small addition bonus 2 and the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are defined as 16R. In the hit pattern 6, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1st round to the start of the 13th round is the interval pattern a, and the interval between the rounds from the end of the 13th round to the start of the 16th round is the interval pattern d. It is stipulated that the large winning opening 37 has an opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the small addition bonus 2 executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 6, the number (135) corresponding to the difference between the number of prize balls (240) and the planned number of prize balls (375) is notified as the number of additions until the second half round. ..

The hit pattern 7 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the bonus without addition, and the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 16R. The hit pattern 7 is defined so that the interval between all rounds from the end of the 1st round to the start of the 16th round is the interval pattern a, and the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all the rounds from the 1st round to the 16th round. Has been done. In the non-addition bonus executed as a production together with the hit pattern 7, there is no difference between the number of prize balls (240) and the planned number of prize balls (240) because over-winning is unlikely to occur, and the number of additions is notified. Absent.

The hit pattern 8 is defined to occur in the small hit game state, and the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern C only once. That is, the hit pattern 8 is executed as a hit pattern in which the possibility of winning the game ball with respect to the large winning opening 37 is extremely low.

The hit pattern may have the following contents. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the time of the interval between rounds is defined as the above-mentioned interval patterns a to d on the premise that the game balls are continuously fired. The time of the interval between rounds may be specified with reference to the start time of the firing operation of. For example, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls are continuously launched by the start of the launch operation, for example, a second game ball may reach the large winning opening shutter 37A from the start of the launch operation. The assumed maximum arrival time of the second wax is 3.99 s (3.33 s + 0.66 s). Similarly, the estimated maximum arrival time of the third item is 4.65 s (3.33s + 0.66s + 0.66s), and the estimated maximum arrival time of the fourth item is 5.31s (3.33s + 0.66s + 0.66s + 0.66s). The assumed maximum arrival time of the first item is 5.97 s (3.33 s + 0.66 + 0.66 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s). As a result, as the interval pattern b, the time corresponding to such a second assumed maximum arrival time may be specified. That is, the interval patterns a to d may be other than the above-mentioned time, but the interval pattern a is preferably a time less than the second assumed maximum arrival time, and the interval pattern b is the third assumed maximum. The time is preferably less than the arrival time, the interval pattern c is preferably the time less than the fourth assumed maximum arrival time, and the interval pattern d is the time less than the fifth assumed maximum arrival time. Is preferable. In the present embodiment, the interval pattern d, which is the maximum time of the interval between rounds, is defined as the time during which four prizes (three over prizes) can be achieved per round, but five or more per round. It may be the time when a prize can be won. However, when five or more prizes can be won, it is preferable that the longitudinal dimension of the large prize opening shutter 37A is a length that allows at least five game balls to pass at the same time. Further, the hit pattern 1 may be assigned the same opening / closing pattern to all of the rounds, or may have different opening / closing patterns only in a part of the rounds. Further, the hit pattern 1 may have a different interval pattern only for a part of the inter-round intervals. Regarding the hit patterns 2 to 7, the opening / closing patterns may be different in some or all rounds. Further, the hit patterns 2 to 7 may have different interval patterns only for some round-to-round intervals.

[Specifications of the large winning opening shutter]
Next, the specifications of the large winning opening shutter 37A will be described with reference to FIG. Note that, in FIG. 10, the positional relationship between the large winning opening shutter 37A (large winning opening 37) and the large winning opening count switch 370 is schematically shown as being different from FIG. 3 and the like for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 10A, the large winning opening shutter 37A is movable in the front-rear direction (the direction indicated by the white arrow in the figure) of the game board 1 (not shown). For example, when the diameter d of the game ball is 11 mm, the large winning opening shutter 37A has a longitudinal dimension L of about d × 8 + a (6 mm) = 94 mm. As a result, a maximum of eight game balls can pass through the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state at the same time. However, in the present embodiment, the firing interval from the launch of one game ball to the launch of the next one game ball according to the start of the firing operation, or the firing of one game ball is performed. As shown in FIG. 10B by considering the arrival time from the game ball to the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A (the upper region of the right end portion of the closed large winning opening shutter 37A). In addition, up to four game balls can pass at the same time. The time until the game ball that has reached the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370 (the time until the inter-round interval starts) is about 0.1 s. Further, it takes about 0.01 s for the large winning opening shutter 37A to move from one of the positions in which the large winning opening 37 is closed and the position in which the large winning opening 37 is opened to the other position. Is.

That is, in the present embodiment, the launching device 26 has 90.90 firings per minute and a firing interval of 0.66 seconds. Further, the time from the launch preparation position (not shown) to the position where the game ball reaches the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A through the first guide rail 30 and the second guide rail 30'is approximately 3.00 to 3. It takes 33 seconds. As a result, in a state where right-handed hitting is continuously performed, the next game ball wins a large prize approximately 0.33 to 0.99 seconds after one game ball reaches the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A. It reaches the right end portion of the mouth shutter 37A. Further, the large winning opening shutter 37A has a longitudinal dimension L of 94 mm, and up to eight game balls having a diameter d = 11 mm can pass through in a row at the same time, but the game balls are 0. Since the inclined surface is such that it advances by 11 mm in 33 seconds, that is, by 22 mm every 0.66 seconds, it is practically possible for a maximum of four game balls to pass at the same time. Then, the inter-round interval is started from the time when the winning of one game ball is detected during the round game, and is started immediately before the large winning opening shutter 37A completely closes the large winning opening 37. Further, regarding the time from when the large winning opening shutter 37A is opened immediately after the game ball reaches the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A until the winning of the game ball is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370. , It takes 0.1 seconds. Further, it is assumed that 0.01 second is required for one opening / closing operation in which the large winning opening shutter 37A moves from the closed position to the open position or from the open position to the closed position.

In the present embodiment, by assuming various times as described above, in the state where the right-handed hit is continuously performed in the big hit game state, the time of the interval between rounds after the end of the 1st round is an interval. If the pattern d is 2.97s, it is possible to win 4 prizes including 3 over prizes per round. Regarding the time of such an interval pattern d, for example, after the game ball detected as winning in the first round reaches the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A, the next game ball is the large winning opening after a maximum of 0.99 seconds. Considering that it reaches the right end portion of the shutter 37A, the time that four game balls including this game ball will be located on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A is approximately 0.99s + 0.66s × 3 ( This is proved by the fact that (pieces) = 2.97s. Further, if the interval between rounds after the end of the 1st round is 2.31 s of the interval pattern c, three prizes including two over prizes per round can be won. This can be assumed as a state in which the number of over-winnings is reduced from three to two over-winnings. As a result, regarding the time of the interval pattern c, the time during which the three game balls will be located on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A is 2.97s of the interval pattern d corresponding to the above-mentioned three over winnings. It is considered that the transit time for one piece is subtracted from, and it is proved from the fact that 2.97s-0.66s = 2.31s. Similarly, if the interval between rounds after the end of the 1st round is 1.65 s of the interval pattern b, two prizes including one over prize per round can be won. This can be assumed as a state in which the number of over-winnings is reduced from two to one over-winning. As a result, with respect to the time of the interval pattern b, the time during which the two game balls will be located on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A is 2.31s of the interval pattern c corresponding to the above-mentioned two over winnings. It is considered that the transit time for one piece is subtracted from, and it is proved from the fact that 2.31s-0.66s = 1.65s. Further, if the interval between rounds after the end of the 1st round is 0.3 s of the interval pattern a, there is no over-winning per round and only one winning is possible. Regarding the time of such an interval pattern a, for example, after the game ball detected as winning in the 1st round reaches the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A, the next game ball is the large winning opening 0.33 seconds at the shortest. Since it reaches the right end portion of the shutter 37A, it is demonstrated that the next game ball is opened before reaching the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A in 0.3 s shorter than 0.33 seconds. To.

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13. In addition, the table defines lottery value (random number value) information for determining a predetermined item based on a lottery value (random number value) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range, and these lottery Value information is synonymous with the so-called lottery rate. The lottery value information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, the "random number value" may be simply referred to as a "random number". In FIGS. 11 and 13, the selection rate (%) corresponding to the lottery rate is shown.

[Additional pattern selection table]
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an additional pattern selection table. This additional pattern selection table is a table referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The addition pattern selection table is a table for selecting an addition pattern as a hit effect pattern, which will be described later, according to the hit patterns 2 to 7. The additional pattern selection table is provided for each of the winning patterns 2 to 7, and defines various additional patterns to be determined and a selection rate (%) when selecting the additional pattern by lottery.

According to the additional pattern selection table (hit pattern 2) associated with the hit pattern 2, the large additional patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the additional patterns corresponding to the large additional bonus. According to the addition pattern selection table (hit pattern 3) associated with the hit pattern 3, the middle addition patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the addition pattern corresponding to the middle addition bonus 1. According to the addition pattern selection table (hit pattern 4) associated with the hit pattern 4, the middle addition patterns 5 to 8 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the addition pattern corresponding to the middle addition bonus 2. According to the additional pattern selection table (hit pattern 5) associated with the hit pattern 5, the small additional patterns 1 to 4 are selected with a predetermined selection rate as the additional patterns corresponding to the small additional bonus 1. According to the additional pattern selection table (hit pattern 6) associated with the hit pattern 6, the small additional patterns 5 to 8 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the additional patterns corresponding to the small additional bonus 2. According to the additional pattern selection table (hit pattern 7) associated with the hit pattern 7, the non-addition pattern 1 is selected at a predetermined selection rate (100% in the present embodiment) as the additional pattern corresponding to the non-addition bonus. Will be done.

The selection rate for sorting the additional pattern, which is a decision item in the additional pattern selection table, is not limited to that shown in FIG. Each of the additional pattern selection tables other than the additional pattern selection table (hit pattern 7) defines four additional patterns, but an additional pattern of 3 or less or 5 or more may be specified, and each additional pattern selection table may be specified. The number of patterns specified for each may be different. A plurality of additional patterns may also be specified in the additional pattern selection table (pattern 7).

[Additional pattern table]
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an additional pattern table. This additional pattern table is a table referred to in the in-round effect processing (see FIG. 37) of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The addition pattern table is a table for defining the number of additions for production and the round for notifying the additions according to the addition pattern. The additional pattern table is provided for each type of bonus, and defines the additional pattern and the number of rounds as reference items and the additional number as a decision item. The number of additional characters is notified with the appearance of additional characters, which will be described later.

According to the addition pattern table (large addition bonus) corresponding to the large addition bonus, the number of rounds and the number of additional additions to be notified are defined for each of the large addition patterns 1 to 4 as the addition pattern. For example, in the large addition pattern 1, "30" is notified as the addition number in the 2nd R, "105" is notified as the addition number in the 4R, and "270" is notified as the addition number in the 7R. The total number of these additions is "405".

According to the addition pattern table (middle addition bonus 1) corresponding to the middle addition bonus 1, the number of rounds and the number of notifications to be added are defined for each of the middle addition patterns 1 to 4 as the addition pattern. For example, in the middle addition pattern 1, "30" is notified as the addition number in the 2nd R, "105" is notified as the addition number in the 4R, and "135" is notified as the addition number in the 7R. The total number of these additions is "270".

According to the addition pattern table corresponding to the middle addition bonus 2 (middle addition bonus 2), the number of rounds and the number of notifications to be added are defined for each of the middle addition patterns 5 to 8 as the addition pattern. For example, in the middle addition pattern 5, "135" is notified as the addition number on the 8th R, and "135" is notified as the addition number on the 9th R. The total number of these additions is "270".

According to the addition pattern table (small addition bonus 1) corresponding to the small addition bonus 1, the number of rounds and the number of notifications to be added are defined for each of the small addition patterns 1 to 4 as the addition pattern. For example, in the small addition pattern 1, "30" is notified as the addition number in the 2nd R, and "105" is notified as the addition number in the 4R. The total number of these additions is "135".

According to the addition pattern table (small addition bonus 2) corresponding to the small addition bonus 2, the number of rounds and the number of notifications to be added are defined for each of the small addition patterns 5 to 8 as the addition pattern. For example, in the small addition pattern 5, "135" is notified as the addition number only to the 8th R.

According to the additional pattern table (non-addition bonus) corresponding to the non-addition bonus, the number of rounds corresponding to the non-addition pattern 1 as the addition pattern and the number of additional additions to be notified are defined. For example, in the non-addition pattern 1, the number of additions is not notified in any round.

The numerical value for distributing the additional number in the additional pattern table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12, and the additional number (405, 270, 135) obtained from the difference between the number of prize balls and the planned number of prize balls should be appropriately distributed. It should be. Further, by notifying a numerical value exceeding the total additional number as an additional number and then setting a numerical value to be notified to be subtracted, the total additional number may be finally determined. .. Further, for example, "210" may be specified as the initial value so that the notification of the additional number is always generated in any round.

[Additional character lottery table]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an additional character lottery table. The additional character lottery table is a table referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The additional character lottery table is a table for selecting an additional character to appear at the start of the additional bonus or at the time of notifying the number of additional characters according to the additional pattern by lottery. The additional character lottery table defines various additional patterns as reference items, additional characters as determination items, and a selection rate (%) when selecting additional characters by lottery. "Animal", "female", and "fireworks master" are defined as additional characters.

For example, in the large addition patterns 1 to 4, the selection rate of the "female" addition character is generally higher than that of the "animal" addition character, and the selection rate of the "fireworks master" addition character is higher than that of the "female" addition character. Is stipulated to be high. In the middle addition patterns 1 to 8, it is stipulated that the selection rate of the addition characters of "female" and "fireworks master" is generally higher than that of the addition characters of "animal". In the small addition patterns 1 to 8, it is stipulated that the selection rate of the addition character of "animal" is generally higher than that of the addition character of "female" or "fireworks master". In the non-addition pattern 1, the selection rate of the addition character of the "animal" is defined to be the highest. The additional characters that appear based on such an additional character lottery table suggest the type of bonus, and the number of additional characters that are notified at the same time as the appearance of the additional characters also raises expectations for the prize ball. be able to.

The selection rate for sorting the additional characters in the additional character lottery table is not limited to that shown in FIG. For various additional characters, an additional pattern that cannot be selected may be specified. For example, the additional character of "animal" cannot be selected only in the large addition pattern, the additional character of "female" cannot be selected only in the non-addition pattern, and the additional character of "fireworks master" cannot be selected. , The selectivity may be specified so that it can be selected only in the medium addition pattern or the large addition pattern.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, the processes executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 14 to 31.

[Main processing by main CPU]
14 and 15 are flowcharts showing the main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 14, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs the watchdog timer disable setting process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S11.

In S11, the main CPU 61 performs input / output port setting processing. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in a power failure detection state. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power failure detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that it is in the power failure detection state and processing is transferred to S12. If the power failure detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that it is not in the power failure detection state and processing is performed in S13. Move.

In S13, the main CPU 61 performs sub-control reception reception wait processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 waits until the sub-control circuit 70 receives a signal. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S14.

In S14, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S15.

In S15, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, the process is transferred to S30 (see FIG. 15), and when it is determined that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON, the process is transferred to S16. Move the process.

In S16, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power failure detection flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S17 when it determines that there is a power failure detection flag, and shifts the process to S30 (see FIG. 15) when it determines that there is no power failure detection flag. ..

In S17, the main CPU 61 performs a process of checking the damage in the work area and calculating the work damage check value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S19 when it determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, and shifts the process to S30 when it determines that the work damage check value is not a normal value. ..

In S19, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 61 performs the initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S21.

In S21, the main CPU 61 performs the probability change state display notification setting process at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the main CPU 61 makes a display notifying that the jackpot winning probability is in the high probability state in the case of the probability variation game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S22. The display to be notified may be configured to end at the first fluctuation start or fluctuation end after the power is turned on.

In S22, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power failure to the sub control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 61 performs initial settings of devices around the main CPU 61. When this processing is completed, the processing is transferred to S24, and the processing is returned to the address before the power failure, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter returned from the stack area.

As shown in FIG. 15, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the stack pointer to 8000H. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S31.

In S31, the main CPU 61 performs a process of acquiring the initial value of the random number related to the hit determination. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 61 performs the entire work area clearing process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to hit determination. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 61 performs the initial setting process of the work area at the time of the initialization of the RAM. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of initialization of the main RAM 63 to the sub-control circuit 70. Further, in the sub-control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 is initialized based on the received command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 61 performs initial settings of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S37.

In S37, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt prohibition process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of prohibiting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 61 performs the initial value random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number for selecting the effect condition. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63, and if the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the process is transferred to S42 and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3. If it is not the above, the process is transferred to S37.

In S42, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 measures the waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70, and the opening time of the large winning opening 37 that is opened when a big hit or a small hit occurs. A security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 when it is detected that there is a fraudulent activity. Etc., the process of updating various timers is executed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. The main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random value and a hit symbol determination random value according to the detection signals from the first start winning opening switch 320 and the second starting winning opening switch 330, and stores them in the main ROM 62. With reference to the big hit determination table (not shown), it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery (big hit and small hit lottery) has been won, and the determination result is stored in the main RAM 63. The special symbol control process of S44 will be described later with reference to FIG. 22. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S45.

In S45, the main CPU 61 normally performs a symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a normal symbol determination random value and a normal symbol determination random value according to a detection signal from the passing gate switch 350, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random value and the main ROM 62. Based on the ordinary symbol winning table (not shown), it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol lottery has been won, and the result of this determination, the random value for determining the ordinary symbol, and the ordinary symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 62. Based on (not shown), it is determined whether the symbol is a lost symbol or a hit symbol, and a process of storing the result of the determination is performed. If the normal symbol lottery is won, the result of the determination indicating the winning symbol is stored, and if the non-winning symbol is won, the result of the determination indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the result of the determination indicating the winning symbol is stored, the blade member 34 is opened three times in 1.3 seconds, four times in 1.4 seconds, or six times in 1.8 seconds, for example. .. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the blade member 34 is opened, and when the blade member 34 is in the open state, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 33. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S46.

In S46, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sends a control signal for driving the LED unit 5 to the main RAM 63 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the normal symbol control process. Perform the process of memorizing. The main CPU 61 transmits the control signal to the LED unit 5. Based on the received control signal, the LED unit 5 causes the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 to display the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a variable manner and a stop display. Further, the normal symbol display unit 51 of the LED unit 5 fluctuates and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S47.

In S47, the main CPU 61 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 generates data related to the game information signal to be transmitted to the stand computer or the hall computer 100, and performs a process of storing the data in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S48.

In S48, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol hold number data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has the first start port switches 320 and the second, which are detected in the special symbol-related switch check process and the normal symbol-related switch check process (S71, S72 in FIG. 17) in the timer interrupt process described later. The first is based on the detection signal from the start port switch 330 and the passing gate switch 350, and the update result of the hold number data stored in the main RAM 63 which is updated according to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the normal symbol. A process of storing a control signal for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56, and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 in the main RAM 63 is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S49.

In S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 63 from each port in the above steps or the like. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs a security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal plate 80, opens and closes an LED power supply (common signal) for lighting the LED, opens and closes the winning opening shutter 37A, and opens and closes the vane member 34. It supplies solenoid power for driving the solenoid that opens and closes. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S50.

In S50, the main CPU 61 performs command control processing related to the winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of controlling a winning opening-related command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S37.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes the gaming processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 61]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following step units. The main CPU 61 may interrupt the main process and execute the timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. This timer interrupt process is a process performed according to a clock pulse generated from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process by the main CPU 61 constitutes the interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 16, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs a register save process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S61.

In S61, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of increasing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 by +1. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process, etc.) on condition that the timer interrupt process is started a predetermined number of times (three times). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacity of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the initial reset circuit 64 to the main CPU 61 A system reset signal is output to. The main CPU 61 enters the system reset state when a system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 61 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates random numbers such as a hit determination random number counter, a hit symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. If the update timing of the counter value is undefined, the random number counter for hit judgment and the random number counter for hit symbol determination will lack fairness. Therefore, in order to guarantee this, the timing is fixed every 2 ms. I am trying to update with. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 61 performs a switch input process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each passing region or the like has detected a winning. For example, when the main CPU 61 detects a winning, the bit corresponding to the passing area determined to have won is set to "1 (ON)". The switch input process of S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S65.

In S65, the main CPU 61 performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 37, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning opening 40, and if there is a winning, each of them. The payout request command corresponding to is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out the prize ball corresponding to the passing area whose bit is "1 (ON)" with the winning of the game ball from the payout device 83, and also sets the set command. Is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 82. Further, when this command is set, the bit corresponding to the passing area that triggered the command set is controlled to "0 (OFF)". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 61 performs command transmission control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub-control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S67.

In S67, the main CPU 61 performs a register reset process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of returning the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this processing is completed, this timer interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a switch input process executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 17, in S70, the main CPU 61 performs the fraud detection switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor (not shown) capable of detecting radio waves, a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor capable of detecting vibration, and the like. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S71. If any of the above sensors is in the detected state, an error notification may be performed, and at that time, for example, even if the large winning opening count switch detects the winning of the game ball, the winning is invalidated. You may try to do it.

In S71, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol-related switch check process. This special symbol-related switch check process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S72.

In S72, the main CPU 61 performs a normal symbol-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input of the passing gate switch 350, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected, and if it is determined that there is an input, the pending number is an upper limit (for example,). It is determined whether or not the number is 4), and if it is determined that the number is the upper limit, this process is terminated. When it is determined that it is not the upper limit, the hit judgment random number value is extracted from the hit judgment random number counter of the normal symbol game, and the hit symbol determination random number value is further extracted from the hit symbol determination random number counter to normalize the main RAM 63. Performs the process of storing in the symbol storage area. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 61 performs a prize ball-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first starting winning opening switch 320, and the second starting winning opening switch 330 have been input. When it is determined that the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning opening winning ball counter is performed, and the first starting winning opening switch 320 or the second winning opening switch 320 or the second When it is determined that the start opening winning opening switch 330 has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the starting opening winning counter corresponding to each is performed. When this processing is completed, this switch input processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol related switch check processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a special symbol-related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol-related switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 18, in S80, the main CPU 61 performs the first start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 61 performs the second start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a large winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, this special symbol-related switch check process routine is terminated.

[1st start port switch check process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This first start port switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 19, in S90, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 is detected based on the detection signal from the first starting port switch 320. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the first start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first start port switch 320 is "1 (ON)", and determines whether or not the bit of the first start port winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", and determines whether or not the bit is "1 (ON)". When the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process is transferred to S91, and when the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", this first starting port Terminates the switch check processing routine.

In S91, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holds is 4 or more, the first start port switch check processing routine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of holds is not 4 or more, the process is transferred to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of start memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by the so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. , The process of extracting the random number value for determining the effect condition from the random number counter for determining the effect condition and storing it in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area includes the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0). Judgment results based on the hit judgment random numbers are derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and various types obtained by winning a prize in the first starting port 32 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random number values of are sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S94.

In S94, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. This start winning command includes information indicating a random number for determining a hit and information indicating a random number for determining a winning symbol. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that the game ball has won a prize and whether or not the winning lottery result has been won. Will be. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, an effect such as changing the display mode of the reserved ball to be displayed, when it is determined in the process of S95 that the winning effect is produced. This enables a so-called "look-ahead effect" in which the effect is executed based on the start memory before the variable execution. When this process is completed, the first start port switch check process routine is terminated.

[2nd start port switch check process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This second start port switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 20, in S100, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is detected based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 330. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the second start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second start port switch 330 is “1 (ON)”, and determines whether or not the bit is “1 (ON)”, and determines whether or not the bit is “1 (ON)”. If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process is transferred to S101, and if the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", this second starting port is used. Terminates the switch check processing routine.

In S101, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holds is 4 or more, the second start port switch check processing routine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of holds is not 4 or more, the process is transferred to S102.

In S102, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of start memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by the so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. , The process of extracting the random number value for determining the effect condition from the random number counter for determining the effect condition and storing it in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area includes the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0). Judgment results based on the hit judgment random numbers are derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and various types obtained by winning a prize in the second starting port 33 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random number values of are sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S104.

In S104, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S105.

In S105, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S106.

In S106, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process is completed, the second start port switch check process routine is terminated.

[Large winning opening switch check process]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This grand prize opening switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 21, in S110, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning of the game ball into the winning opening 37 is detected based on the detection signal from the winning opening count switch 370. .. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 37 is detected, it shifts the process to S111 and determines that the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 37 is not detected. In that case, the large winning opening switch check processing routine is terminated.

In S111, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large winning opening winning counter. The large winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the number of winnings of the game ball detected in one round has reached the specified number of winnings. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 61 sets a large winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The grand prize opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the winning of the game ball to the grand winning opening 37. Become. On condition of receiving such a large winning opening winning command, the sub-control circuit 70 adds, for example, the number of additional balls displayed during the additional bonus to the planned number of winning balls described later. When this process is completed, the large winning opening switch check process routine is terminated.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol control process is executed in the following step units. In FIG. 22, the numerical values shown on the sides of S121 to S128 indicate the control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area of the control state flags in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63 according to the numerical value. As a result, the special symbol game will proceed.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the first S120, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading the control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S121.

In S121 to S128, which will be described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes in S121 to S128 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 61 executes the process in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the process in each step, and executes other subroutines. The main CPU 61 also executes a timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle.

In S121, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol memory check process. The details of S121 will be described later with reference to FIG. 23. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management, and when the fluctuation time elapses, sets the value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management to the control state flag. Set and set the waiting time (for example, 600ms) after confirmation in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S123 after the waiting time has elapsed after the confirmation. The details of S122 will be described later with reference to FIG. 25. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a big hit or a small hit when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management and the waiting time elapses after the determination. When the main CPU 61 is a big hit or a small hit, the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management is set in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the hit start interval is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the process of S124 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a big hit or a small hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S128. The details of this S123 will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S124.

In S124, the main CPU 61 executes the hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a control state flag having a value (03H) indicating hit start interval management, and when the time corresponding to the hit start interval elapses, the large winning opening shutter read from the main ROM 62. Data for opening 37A is stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the process of S49 of FIG. 15, the main CPU 61 reads out the data for opening the large winning opening shutter 37A stored in the main RAM 63, and sends a signal to open the large winning opening shutter 37A. It is supplied to the large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A. As a result, the main CPU 61 controls the opening and closing of the large winning opening 37. That is, a hit game state is executed in which a predetermined advantageous game (a round game in which the large winning opening 37 changes into an open state in which the game ball is easily accepted and a closed state in which it is difficult to accept the game ball after an interval period) is repeated a predetermined time. Become. In this case, a small hit game state in which the large winning opening 37 is short-opened only once may be executed.

Further, the main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 10s of the opening / closing pattern A per round) in the large winning opening opening time timer. set. That is, it is set to execute the process of S126. The details of S124 will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S165.

In S125, the main CPU 61 executes the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a control state flag having a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the inter-round interval (interval patterns a to d) has elapsed, The memory is updated so that the number of times the large winning opening opening counter is increased by "1". The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 10s of the opening / closing pattern A per round) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S126. The details of S125 will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S126.

In S126, the main CPU 61 executes the process during the opening of the large winning opening. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open, the main CPU 61 has elapsed the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is "1" or more, and the opening upper limit time has elapsed ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 in order to close the big winning opening 37. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or more than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 sets a value (06H) indicating the winning end interval in the control state flag when it is the final round, and a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the large winning opening when it is not the final round. Is set to the control status flag. The details of S126 will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S127.

In S127, the main CPU 61 executes the hit end interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval, and when the time corresponding to the hit end interval elapses, the main CPU 61 controls the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. Set to flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S128. The details of S127 will be described later with reference to FIG. 30. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S128.

In S128, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol game end process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a value (00H) indicating the special symbol memory check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, it is set to execute the process of S121. The details of S128 will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. When this process is completed, the special symbol control process routine is terminated.

As described above, by setting the control state flag, the special symbol game is executed. Specifically, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is lost. ) And (07H) in this order, the processes of S121, S122, S123, and S128 shown in FIG. 22 are executed at predetermined timings. Further, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is the big hit or the small hit. ), The processes of S121, S122, and S123 shown in FIG. 22 are executed at predetermined timings, and control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags in the order of (03H), (04H), and (05H), so that FIG. 22 shows. The processes of S124, S126, and S125 shown above are executed at predetermined timings, and the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed. When the end condition of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is satisfied, the processes of S125, S127 to S128 shown in FIG. 21 are performed by setting (04H), (06H), and (07H) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit game state or the small hit game state is ended.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a special symbol memory check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol memory check process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 23, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag has a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol memory check, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S131. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 ends this special symbol storage check processing routine.

In S131, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the presence / absence of start storage. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start storage. If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to S132. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is a start memory, the process shifts to S133.

In S132, the main CPU 61 performs a demo display process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 63. Further, the state in which the start memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol start storage area or the second special symbol start storage area in which the random value for hit determination is stored) becomes "0" is a predetermined time (for example, 30 s). If it is maintained, set the value that allows execution of the demo display as the demo display permission value. Then, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command stored in this way is supplied as a demo display command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. As a result, the demo display is executed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this processing is completed, the special symbol memory check processing routine is terminated.

In S133, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the presence / absence of data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". That is, when it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to S134. When it is determined that the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not "0", that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), S135 Move the process to.

In S134, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S136.

In S135, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S136.

In S136, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S137.

In S137, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage transfer process. In this process, when the special symbol to be variablely displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 first displays the data of the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). When the special symbol that shifts (stores) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) and is displayed in a variable manner is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area A process of shifting (storing) each of the data from the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is executed. To do. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S138.

In S138, the main CPU 61 executes the jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) in which the number of determination values (big hit determination values) to be jackpots differs depending on whether or not the game status flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Select the judgment table. That is, when the game state flag is a value indicating the probability variation game state, the jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the game status flag is not a value indicating the probability variation game state, the jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment table for the non-probability variable game state with few flags is referred to. In this way, when the game state flag is a value indicating the probability change game state, that is, when the game state is the probability change game state as a special game state in which it is easy to shift to the specific game state (big hit game state), the jackpot game state is set. The probability of transition is higher than that of the probabilistic gaming state as the special gaming state, as compared to the non-probability changing gaming state as the non-special gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the specific gaming state.

The special gaming state is a probabilistic / short-time gaming state, and the non-special gaming state is basically a non-probable / non-short-time gaming state, but the special gaming state is at least one of the probabilistic gaming state and the short-time gaming state. It may be one of the gaming states. The non-special gaming state may include a non-probability variable gaming state and a time-saving gaming state.

Then, the main CPU 61 is extracted at the time of winning the game ball, and is used for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). Refer to the random number value and the selected jackpot judgment table. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the jackpot determination value match, the main CPU 61 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to set the jackpot game state advantageous to the player.

As described above, in the process of S138, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S139.

In S139, the main CPU 61 executes the small hit determination process when it is determined in the big hit determination process of S138 that the big hit has not been won. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a small hit determination table that defines a determination value (small hit determination value) that is a small hit regardless of the game state flag.

Then, the main CPU 61 is a random value for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area extracted at the time of winning the game ball and set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). With reference to the selected small hit determination table. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the small hit determination value match, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit.

Since the small hit can occur in either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the hit determination random stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area. The small hit determination process is performed based on the numerical value, but the small hit determination process may be performed based only on the hit determination random value stored in one of the special symbol start storage areas.

As described above, in the processing of S139, either a small hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game, and when neither the big hit determination processing of S138 nor the small hit determination processing of S139 is won, the special symbol is selected. Loss will be decided as the judgment result of the game. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S140.

In S140, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines a big hit symbol when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and determines a small hit symbol when the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, and for either the big hit or the small hit. In the case of loss, the process of determining the loss pattern is performed. The details of this S140 will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S141.

In S141, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 is different based on the special symbol determined in the process of S140, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination determined in the processes of S138 and S139, and the value of the probability variation counter. Select the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern. Then, the main CPU 61 determines the variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores the variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, in the ST gaming state and the normal gaming state, different fluctuation pattern determination tables are provided. The main CPU 61 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. Note that this process is the same even during the ST gaming state.

The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is subjected to variable display in the variable pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, the data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied as a variation pattern designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes the effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol variation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes the process of clearing the storage area used for the variation display this time. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S143.

Then, in S143, the main CPU 61 executes a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the fluctuation display this time. When this processing is completed, the special symbol memory check processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol determination process]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 24, in S150, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, the process is transferred to S151. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S156.

In S151, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the fluctuation state number of the jackpot determined in S150 is a value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation is the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S152 when the variation state number is a value (01H) indicating that the variation is the first special symbol. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 has a value (02H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is a variation of the first special symbol, that is, a value (02H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is a variation of the second special symbol. In that case, the process is transferred to S154.

In S152, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random value for determining the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shows the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol (shown in the first special symbol jackpot symbol distribution of FIG. 7) based on the hit symbol determination random value and the jackpot determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. Performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol corresponds to probability variation 1. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S153.

In S153, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the determined jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the jackpot symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 fluctuates the first special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S159.

In S154, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shows the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol (shown in the second special symbol jackpot symbol distribution of FIG. 7) based on the hit symbol determination random value and the jackpot determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. A process of determining which of the probabilistic variation 1 to the probabilistic variation 6) is performed is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S155.

In S155, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the determined jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the jackpot symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 fluctuates the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S159.

In S156, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the result determined by the small hit determination process (S139 in FIG. 23) is a small hit. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S157 when a small hit is won. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S161 when the small hit is not won.

In S157, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 uses the small hit symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (the first of FIG. 7) based on the hit symbol determination random value and the small hit determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. -Perform a process to determine whether the second special symbol is a small hit symbol shown in the symbol distribution). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S158.

In S158, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the determined small hit symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and a command set of the small hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variablely displays the special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the small hit symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. .. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the small hit stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S159.

In S159, the main CPU 61 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S160.

In S160, the main CPU 61 performs data set processing related to the number of times the large winning opening is opened. In this process, the main CPU 61 converts the data related to the number of times the large winning opening 37 is opened, that is, the probability variation 1 by the first special symbol, the probability variation 1 to the probability variation 6 by the second special symbol, or the small hit symbol. The process of setting the corresponding data in the main RAM 63 is performed. When this process is completed, this special symbol determination process routine is terminated.

On the other hand, in S161, when it is determined that the main CPU 61 is neither a big hit in S150 nor a small hit in S156, that is, it is lost, it performs a data set of lost symbols and a command set of lost symbols. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 fluctuates the special symbol and stops and displays the special symbol in a mode based on the data of the lost symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command of the lost symbol from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the loss stop display mode. When this process is completed, this special symbol determination process routine is terminated.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a special symbol fluctuation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol fluctuation time management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 25, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value indicating special symbol fluctuation time management (value set in the special symbol memory check process: 01H). When the main CPU 61 determines that the value (01H) indicates the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S171. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value (01H) does not indicate the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine.

In S171, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer set in the special symbol memory check process is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S172. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not "0", the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine is terminated.

In S172, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and shifts the process to S173. At this time, the main CPU 61 recognizes the symbol stop by the symbol display device control process, and derives the display result with the symbol determined by the special symbol determination process.

In S173, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. Then, the symbol stop command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a symbol stop command, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S174.

In S174, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the waiting time after determination in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 63. In the present embodiment, if the symbol to be stopped and displayed is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, for example, 1002 ms is set as the waiting time after confirmation, and if the symbol is lost, for example, 540 ms is set as the waiting time after confirmation. .. In both cases of the winning symbol and the lost symbol, the same waiting time after confirmation may be used, or the waiting time after confirmation may be longer for the lost symbol than for the winning symbol. When this process is completed, the special symbol fluctuation time management process routine is terminated.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol display time management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 26, in S180, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process is transferred to S181. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

In S181, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S182. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

In S182, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S183. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S184.

In S183, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal game state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the game state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S190.

In S184, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". The probability variation number counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (symbol variation number) in the probability variation game state. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S189. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S185.

In S185, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability variation counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S186.

In S186, the main CPU 61 again determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". When the value of the probability variation counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S187. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S189.

In S187, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a probability change end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a probability change end command indicating the end of the probability change game state in the main RAM 63. Then, the probability change end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the game state, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the probability change game state. Become. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S188.

In S188, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal game state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the game state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S189.

In S189, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it shifts the process to S190. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S194.

In S190, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S191. In the present embodiment, the hit start interval time corresponding to the case where the second special symbol is the jackpot symbol of "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" is the right end of the jackpot shutter 37A after the game ball is launched. It is shorter than the shortest time of 3000 ms to reach the portion, for example, 2500 ms.

In S191, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 starts the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Become aware. The hit start display command includes data indicating the start of a big hit game state or a small hit game state and a specific hit pattern. Based on the data indicating the hit pattern included in the hit start display command, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern such as an additional pattern in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening opening number counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the special symbol display time management process routine is terminated.

In S194, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the end process of the special symbol game as a control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the special symbol display time management process routine is terminated.

[Hit start interval management process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit start interval management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 27, in S200, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag has a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the process is transferred to S201. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management process routine.

In S201, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S202. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

In S202, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S203. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S205.

In S203, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening counter in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and shifts the process to S204.

In S204, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the large winning opening opening number counter, and shifts the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) hit pattern data indicating a big winning opening opening / closing pattern according to the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the hit pattern (big winning opening opening / closing pattern) shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol determined in S205. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S206.

In S206, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a display command during opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command indicating that the large winning opening is open is data indicating the start of the round game. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a process during opening of the large winning opening to the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S208.

In S208, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S209.

In S209, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set as 10s when the time corresponding to the value (number of rounds) of the large winning opening opening number counter, for example, if the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is "probability variation 1". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S210.

In S210, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the big winning opening 37. The variable stored in this way drives the large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the large winning opening 37. When this process is completed, the hit start interval management process routine is terminated. In this embodiment, data corresponding to any of the opening / closing patterns A to C is set as the data during the opening of the large winning opening.

[Waiting time management process before reopening the big prize opening]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which is executed by the main CPU 61. This waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 28, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, the process is transferred to S221. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management processing routine before reopening the large winning opening.

In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S222. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management processing routine before reopening the large winning opening.

In S222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S223.

In S223, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a display command during opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command indicating that the large winning opening is open is data indicating the start of the round game. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a large winning opening opening display command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S224.

In S224, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a process during opening of the large winning opening to the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S225.

In S225, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S227.

In S227, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the waiting time management process routine before reopening the large winning opening is terminated. Also in this process, data corresponding to any of the opening / closing patterns A to C is set as the data during the opening of the large winning opening.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a process during opening of the large winning opening executed by the main CPU 61. This process during the opening of the winning opening is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 29, in S230, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, the processing is transferred to S231. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine during opening of the large winning opening.

In S231, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the large winning opening winning counter is "1" or more. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening winning counter is "1" or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S234. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening winning counter is not "1" or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S232.

In S232, the main CPU 61 executes the big winning opening opening / closing process according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round in the jackpot type and the current round, and transfers the processing to S233. In S232, a large winning opening opening / closing process is also executed according to the opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit.

In S233, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the opening time of the big winning opening is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S234. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine during opening of the large winning opening.

In S234, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the big winning opening. The variable stored in this way closes the large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S235.

In S235, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it shifts the process to S240. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it shifts the processing to S236.

In S236, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the large winning opening opening number (number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the large winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number (number of rounds), and the value of the large winning opening opening number counter. Is greater than or equal to the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened is 16 (16R). When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the winning opening opening number, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S240. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 does not determine that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63. The interval display time between rounds is set to the time corresponding to the interval patterns a to d. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S238.

In S238, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S239.

In S239, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process routine for opening the large winning opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S241.

In S241, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S242.

In S242, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The hit end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When this process is completed, the process routine for opening the large winning opening is terminated.

[Hit end interval management process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit end interval management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 30, in S250, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the process is transferred to S251. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management process routine.

In S251, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is "0". In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S252. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management processing routine.

In S252, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game of the main RAM 63 in the special symbol control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the type of the finished hit game state is a big hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S254. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S256.

In S254, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the game state flag of the main RAM 63 to "01H". The game state flag "01H" indicates a probabilistic game state and a time-saving game state. The game state flag "00H" indicates a non-probability variation game state and a non-time saving game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "10" as the number of STs in the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the hit end interval management process routine is terminated.

In S256, the main CPU 61 sets the game state command and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The game state command is a command including information indicating the type of the finished hit game state (big hit, small hit) in addition to the information indicating the game state controlled after the end of the big hit game state. Such a game state command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game end process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 31, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the processing is transferred to S261. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol game end processing routine.

In S261, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 63 as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the special symbol game end process routine is terminated.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, the processes executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 32 to 38. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processes such as display control processing.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the sub CPU 71. This main process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 32, in S270, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of initializing in response to a power-on. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S271.

In S271, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the random number values (random number counter value for effect determination, random number counter value for determination of stop symbol, etc.) stored in the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S272.

In S272, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. The details of this process will be described later, but the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S273. The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

In S273, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for displaying in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. The display control circuit 76 including the VDP (Video Display Processor) outputs various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and effect image data based on the data for displaying the effect image from the sub CPU 71. It is read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S274.

In S274, the sub CPU 71 performs voice control processing for controlling the sounds generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c via the voice control circuit 77. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S275.

In S275, the sub CPU 71 executes a lamp control process for controlling light emission (lighting / blinking) of the lamp / LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S276.

In S276, the sub CPU 71 performs the movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S271, and thereafter, the processes of S271 to S276 are repeated.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute the command reception interrupt process or the timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. Hereinafter, the command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 33, and the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 34.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 33, in S280, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S281.

In S281, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the receive buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the receive buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process of FIG. 35. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S282.

In S282, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning the program saved in S280 to each register. When this processing is completed, the command reception interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 34, in S290, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S291.

In S291, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processes. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S292.

In S292, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of detecting the presence or absence of an operation of the pressing operation button 9A. This process is actually a determination process, but since it is an interrupt process, it will be described here as one routine. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S293.

In S293, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning the program saved in S290 to each register. When this processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 35, in S300, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S301. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 71 ends this command analysis processing routine.

In S301, the sub CPU 71 reads the data of the received command and performs processing according to the data of the command in the subsequent steps. When the reading of the data of the received command is completed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S302.

In S302, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received as the command read in S301. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S303. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S304.

In S303, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern including the variation display mode of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern designation command. When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S304, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol designation command is received as the command read in S301. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S305. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S306.

In S305, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decoration symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration symbol data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

The decorative symbols displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers "1" to "7", and the number of these decorative symbols (numbers) is a predetermined number (for example, three (three digits)). )) When the same decorative symbols (numbers) are aligned, the game basically shifts to the jackpot game state. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is "probability variation 1", there is a predetermined probability (for example, when the second special symbol is "probability variation 1", the probability is 1/10 of that). The decorative pattern is a set of numbers "3" or "7". In addition, the decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot symbol "probability change 1" of the first special symbol are the numbers "1", "2", "4" to "6", and the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol " The decorative symbols corresponding to "Probability change 1" to "Probability change 6" are a set of numbers "1", "2", and "4" to "6". Further, the decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol has a specific number of "135" as a combination of the specific symbols, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the loss has a random number other than the specific roll. Regarding the correspondence between the jackpot symbol and the decorative symbol, as a uniquely determined relationship, for example, the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol "probability variation 1" is set as a set of "3" or "7", and the jackpot symbol "probability variation 1" is set. The decorative symbols corresponding to "2" to "probability variation 6" may be aligned with "1", "2", and "4" to "6". Further, for example, in the case of the "large addition bonus", the decorative symbol is set to "3" or "7", and in the case of the "medium addition bonus", the decorative symbol is "1" or "5". In the case of "small addition bonus" and "no addition bonus", the decoration design is set to "2", "4", or "6", and the decoration design is stopped for each type of jackpot. May be uniquely determined.

In S306, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol stop command is received as the command read in S301. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S307. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S308.

In S307, the sub CPU 71 performs a decorative symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S308, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit start display command is received as the command read in S301. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S309. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S310.

In S309, the sub CPU 71 executes the hit effect pattern determination process. The hit effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S310, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the large winning opening opening display command is received as the command read in S301. When the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the large winning opening opening display command as the read command, it shifts the process to S311. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub CPU 71 has not received the large winning opening opening display command as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S312.

In S311 the sub CPU 71 executes the effect processing during the round. The effect processing during this round will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S312, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit end display command is received as the command read in S301. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S313. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S314.

In S313, the sub CPU 71 executes the hit end effect process. The hit end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S314, the sub CPU 71 also executes processing corresponding to the received command. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

[Hit effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional pattern or the like as an effect pattern in the big hit game state, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 36, in S320, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets any of "01H" to "08H" in the hit effect pattern flag according to the stop symbol designation information of the special symbol included in the received hit start display command. Regarding the hit effect pattern flag, "01H" corresponds to the normal bonus, and each of "02H" to "07H" has a large additional bonus, a medium additional bonus 1, 2, a small additional bonus 1, 2, and a non-addition bonus. Correspondingly, "08H" corresponds to a small hit. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S321.

In S321, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "02H" to "07H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the start of the additional bonus or the non-addition bonus is based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "02H" to "07H", the process is transferred to S322. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is neither "02H" to "07H", the process is transferred to S328.

In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of selecting the additional pattern selection table according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S323.

In S323, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected additional pattern selection table and performs a process of selecting one of the additional patterns. At this time, for example, one of the additional patterns can be selected by using the random value for determining the effect. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S324.

In S324, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value corresponding to the selected additional pattern in the additional pattern flag. In the present embodiment, 21 additional patterns are provided, and each of the large additional pattern 1 to 4, the medium additional pattern 1 to 8, the small additional pattern 1 to 8, and the non-addition pattern 1 has an additional pattern. Flags "01H" to "15H" correspond. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S325.

In S325, the sub CPU 71 refers to the additional character selection table and performs a process of selecting the additional character according to the value of the additional pattern flag. At this time, for example, one of the additional characters can be selected by using the effect determination random value. As the additional character, "animal", "female", and "fireworks master" are selected as additional characters. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S326.

In S326, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data during the hit start interval corresponding to the value of the additional pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data up to the start of the round game, including the display of the additional character determined based on the additional character selection table and the display of the number of additional characters as the initial value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S327.

In S327, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "240" in the prize ball number counter. This value of "240" corresponds to at least the number of prize balls that will be paid out in the round game of 16R, and is displayed as the initial value of the planned number of prize balls at the hit start interval. If the number of additions is not notified at all, that is, in the case of a bonus without additions, "240" as an initial value is continuously displayed without being added for each round. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is terminated.

In S328, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data during the hit start interval according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data up to the start of the round game corresponding to the normal bonus or the small hit. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is terminated.

[Direction processing during the round]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during the round executed by the sub CPU 71. This in-round effect process is a process for determining whether or not to notify the additional number for each round, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 37, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the round counter. The round counter is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time one round game is executed (every time a command indicating that the big winning opening is open is received), and the number of rounds currently being executed (of the executed round game). It is a counter for indicating the number of times), and basically the same value as the large winning opening opening number counter used for the main CPU 61 is counted. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S331.

In S331, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not an additional bonus (including a non-addition bonus) is being executed based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If the value of the hit effect pattern flag corresponds to any of "02H" to "07H" and it is determined that the additional bonus is being executed, the process is transferred to S332. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is neither "02H" to "07H" and the additional bonus is not being executed, the process is transferred to S336.

In S332, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of selecting an additional pattern table according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S333.

In S333, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected additional pattern table, and notifies the additional number based on the value of the additional pattern flag (addition pattern) and the value indicated by the round number counter (number of rounds). Performs a process of determining whether or not. If it is determined that the round is for notifying the additional number, the process is transferred to S334. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round does not notify the additional number, the process is transferred to S336.

In S334, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting data for notifying the number of additions based on the addition pattern table. As a result, the number of additions is displayed together with the selected addition character in the display area 4A during the corresponding round. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S335.

In S335, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding a value corresponding to the number of added balls to the prize ball number counter. As a result, in the prize ball number counter, the additional number defined based on the additional pattern table is added from the initial value "240", and the counter value is increased to the planned number of prize balls for each addition. For example, in the case of the large addition pattern 4, the addition number "135" is added at the 1st, 4th, and 7th rounds, and finally the planned number of prize balls "645" combined with the initial value "240" is displayed. Will be done. The planned number of prize balls is displayed based on the value of the prize ball counter, but the planned number of prize balls is not displayed immediately after the addition to the prize ball counter, and the effect is executed according to the addition. It will be added and displayed later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S336.

In S336, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data during the round according to the value of the round number counter. For example, in the case of an additional bonus, the sub CPU 71 sets data for displaying different effects including a background image in the 1st to 7th R and the 8th to 16th R. In the case of normal bonus and small hit, the same production data is always set in each round. When this process is completed, the effect processing routine during the round is terminated.

[Hit end production process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit end effect process is a process for determining the effect content in the hit end interval at the end of the big hit or the small hit, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 38, in S340, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "02H" to "07H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the bonus is an additional bonus or a non-addition bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "02H" to "07H", the process is transferred to S341. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is neither "02H" to "07H", the process is transferred to S342.

In S341, the sub CPU 71 sets the value of the prize ball counter to "0" and performs a process of resetting the counter value. The planned number of prize balls is displayed based on the value of the prize ball counter, but the planned number of prize balls is not displayed as 0 immediately after the reset of the prize ball counter, and the effect is produced after a predetermined time has elapsed. At the same time, the display of the planned number of prize balls can be switched. Further, when the value of the prize ball counter is reset, the planned prize ball number may not be displayed as "0", but the planned prize ball number display itself may be hidden. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S342.

In S342, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting end effect data according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data at the end of the winning game state. At this time, as the end effect data, data of different effect contents is set according to any one of a normal bonus, an additional bonus (including a non-addition bonus), and a small hit. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S343.

In S343, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" in the hit effect pattern flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S344.

In S344, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" in the round number counter. When this process is completed, the hit end effect processing routine is terminated.

[Example of operation when over-winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, an operation example when an over-winning occurs at the large winning opening 37 will be described.

39 and 40 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the large winning opening shutter 37A when an over winning occurs. Note that FIGS. 39 and 40 schematically show the behavior from the start of the hit start interval in the large addition bonus to the inter-round interval after the end of the 2Rth through the 1st round, but for convenience, the 1st and 2nd rounds are shown. As the interval between rounds between the eyes, the interval pattern d is applied, unlike the one shown in FIG. 9 described above. In addition, the game ball is continuously fired immediately after the start of the hit start interval, and after a uniform 3.1 s elapse, the game ball hits the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A (in the open state, the right end portion of the corresponding large winning opening 37). It shall be reached. Each game ball is given an order such as (0), (1), ... In the order of launch.

First, as shown in FIG. 39A, the large winning opening shutter 37A keeps the large winning opening 37 closed until, for example, 2.5 s, which is the hit start interval time, has elapsed. That is, since the hit start interval time is shorter than the shortest time of 3 s required for the game ball to reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A after launching the game ball, immediately after the start of the hit start interval. Even if the right-handed launch operation of the game ball is started, the game ball does not reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A that closes the large winning opening 37.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), the 1st round starts when the hit start interval time elapses, and the large winning opening shutter 37A retracts in the direction of the white arrow to open the large winning opening 37. And. Even at this point, the game ball has not reached the right end of the grand prize opening 37.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39 (C), the game ball (0) launched immediately after the start of the hit start interval is the large winning opening 37 which is opened along the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 (not shown). It rolls to the vicinity of the right end.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39 (D), the game ball (0) passes through the open large winning opening 37 and falls downward, and the winning is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370. .. That is, when the winning number reaching the specified number of winnings "1" is detected, the 1st round is ended and the interval between rounds before the start of the 2nd round is started. At this time, the time from the start of the hit start interval to the detection of winning of the game ball (0) launched immediately after that is approximately 3.2 s.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39 (E), with the start of the inter-round interval, the large winning opening shutter 37A starts to project in the direction of the white arrow in order to close the special winning opening 37 again. To do. At this time, the large winning opening shutter 37A completes the operation of projecting from the open position to the closed position in about 0.01 s. Further, since the firing interval of the game balls is 0.66 s, the next game ball (1) has reached the vicinity of the right end of the large winning opening 37, which is in the process of transitioning to the closed state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (F), when the large winning opening shutter 37A completely closes the large winning opening 37 during the interval between rounds before the start of the second round, the game ball (1) wins the large winning opening. It reaches the right end portion of the mouth shutter 37A. The time for the game ball (1) to reach such a position is approximately 3.1 s after the launch, and is approximately 0.56 s when calculated from the start time of the inter-round interval (time of FIG. 39 (D)). It will be after the lapse.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 40 (G) to 40 (I), the large winning opening shutter 37A closes the large winning opening 37 until the time specified as the inter-round interval, for example, 2.97 s of the interval pattern d elapses. Make it a state. During that time, on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A, the game balls (1) to (4) pass from the right side to the left side in a line. At this time, the game balls (1) to (4) sequentially reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A approximately every 0.66 seconds, and roll at a speed of further advancing 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. To go. As a result, the four game balls (1) to (4) are positioned on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A with an interval of about one. When calculated from the start time of the inter-round interval (time point of FIG. 39 (D)), the time to reach the state of FIG. 40 (G) is approximately 1.22 s, and the state of FIG. 40 (H) is reached. The time is approximately 1.88 s, and the time to reach the state shown in FIG. 40 (I) is approximately 2.54 s.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (J), when 2.97 s of the interval pattern d elapses, the interval between rounds ends and the second round starts, and the large winning opening shutter 37A has an operating time of about 0.01 s. By retracting in the direction of the white arrow, the large winning opening 37 is opened again. At this time, the game balls (1) to (4) are still passing at a relatively low speed on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A. As a result, the four game balls (1) to (4) pass through the open large winning opening 37 all at once and fall downward, and the large winning opening count switch 370 wins four prizes. Is detected. That is, immediately after the start of the 2nd round when the inter-round interval ends, 3 over-winnings are detected in addition to 1 winning of the specified number of winnings from 4. Similarly, if the interval pattern c is 2.31s, 1 + 2 over-winnings are detected, and if the interval pattern b is 1.65s, 1 + 1 over-winnings are detected, and the interval pattern a is 0. In the case of .3s, it can be easily understood that only one prize corresponding to the specified number of prizes is detected and no over prize is detected.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (K), the winning of the game ball (the game ball (4) not shown in the figure) that first reaches the position of the large winning opening count switch 370 is detected, and the 2Rs are detected. The eyes are finished and the inter-round interval before the start of the 3rd round is started. At this time, the next game ball (5) is located near the right end of the large winning opening 37, which is in the process of being closed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (L), when the large winning opening shutter 37A completely closes the large winning opening 37 again in the interval between rounds before the start of the 3rd round, the game ball (5) wins the large winning opening. It will reach the right end portion of the mouth shutter 37A. By controlling such a series of operation timings based on the interval patterns b to d, 1 to 3 over prizes are realized in a predetermined round after the 2nd round.

FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining various operation timings related to the big winning opening, and shows the operation timings in the large addition bonus according to FIGS. 39 and 40. Also in FIG. 41, for convenience, the interval pattern d is applied as the interval between the 1st and 2nd rounds and after the end of the 2nd round, which is different from that shown in FIG. 9 described above. The "launched state" indicates a state in which a firing operation is not performed or a firing stop operation is performed as "unlaunched", and a state in which a firing operation is performed is indicated as "launching". "Game state" indicates a round game and an interval in a jackpot game state. "Time required" indicates the time required for a round game and an interval. The "large winning opening" indicates a closed state or an open state of the large winning opening 37. “Number of balls on the shutter” indicates the number of game balls located along the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A. “Elapsed time after change in the number of balls on the shutter” indicates the elapsed time when the number of game balls on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A changes. “Showed state” indicates a symbol at the end of FIGS. 39 (A) to 40 (L). In addition, in (E) and (K) shown as illustrations, "*" is added because the large winning opening 37 is not in a completely closed state.

As shown in FIG. 41, assuming that the jackpot is confirmed (the jackpot starts) and the firing operation is started approximately 0.1 s later, the time until the game ball is actually launched is approximately 0.66 s. It takes about 3.1 s for the game ball thus launched to reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A. On the other hand, when 2.5 s has elapsed as the hit start interval after the big hit is confirmed, the big winning opening 37 is in the open state. As a result, the game ball that has reached the position corresponding to the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370 in about 0.1 s. That is, the time from when the jackpot is confirmed until the launch operation is started and the first game ball launched in this way is detected by the jackpot count switch 370 is 0.1 + 0.66 + 3.1 + 0.1 = It will be 3.96s. The opening time of 1R is 1.46s, which is obtained by subtracting the hit start interval time of 2.5s from this time.

After that, the interval between rounds after the end of the 1st round starts, and the big winning opening 37 is closed again. At this time, the large winning opening 37 is closed for 2.97 s of the interval pattern d. Then, in the large winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state, the number of game balls located on the upper surface thereof increases by one approximately every 0.66s, and by the start of the second round in which the large winning opening 37 is opened again. Four game balls are supported by the large winning opening shutter 37A. Therefore, when the 2nd round is started and the large winning opening 37 is opened, the winning of four game balls is detected. When the winning of one of the game balls is first detected after approximately 0.1 s has passed, the large winning opening 37 is closed, the inter-round interval after the end of the 2nd round is started, and even in the 3rd round (not shown), 4 Winning of individual game balls will be detected. In this way, if the time of the interval between rounds is 2.97 s of the interval pattern d, 1 + 3 over prizes can be realized. Similarly, if the interval pattern c is 2.31s, 1 + 2 over-winning can be realized, and if the interval pattern b is 1.65s, 1 + 1 over-winning can be realized.

[Example of screen display of additional bonus]
42 to 44 are diagrams showing an example of screen display of the additional bonus. FIG. 42 is a screen display example of the additional bonus corresponding to the large additional pattern 1, FIG. 43 is a screen display example of the additional bonus corresponding to the small additional pattern 5, and FIG. 44 corresponds to the non-addition pattern 1. This is an example of the screen display of the additional bonus.

First, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), when a large additional bonus corresponding to the hit pattern 2 is determined as the additional bonus and the large additional pattern 1 is selected as the additional pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval is selected. An image 700 indicating the start of the additional bonus is displayed above, and an image 701 prompting a right-handed hit is displayed. At this time, for example, an additional character 702A of "fireworks master" selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 showing the initial value "+240" of the planned number of prize balls is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), when the 1st round is started, a display field 704 indicating the type of the additional character is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the planned number of prize balls is added for each addition of the additional characters. The display column 705 for displaying the addition and the display column 706 for displaying the period of the first half round as the "additional specialization zone" and the period of the second half round as the "prize ball increase zone" described later are displayed. Such display columns 704 to 706 are displayed until the end of 16 rounds. For example, in the display column 704, the "fireworks master" corresponding to the additional character 702A is displayed until the end of 16 rounds. On the other hand, in the display field 705, after the additional number is displayed in the center of the screen, the planned number of prize balls to which the additional number is added is additionally displayed. In the large addition pattern 1, it is stipulated that the number of additions is not displayed in the 1st round (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in the 1st round, only the initial value "240" is displayed in the display field 705 and the center of the screen. The number of additions is not displayed. Further, in the display column 706, basically, the "additional special zone" is displayed from the 1st round to the 7th round, and the "prize ball increase zone" is displayed after the 8th round. As a result, the "additional special zone" is displayed in the display column 706 of the 1st R. As will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, the display column 706 after the 8th round may simply display an “additional bonus” instead of the “prize ball increase zone”. The "additional specialization zone" displayed in the display column 706 indicates that the planned number of prize balls is additionally displayed with a high probability. The "prize ball addition zone" displayed in the display column 706 indicates that a round game in which an over-winning can be expected is in progress. The "additional bonus" displayed in the display column 706 indicates that the player is in a round game in which an over-winning due to the additional bonus cannot be expected. The image 700 of the "additional bonus" displayed at the upper part of the display area 4A indicates the start of the additional bonus.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (C), when the 2nd round is started, the large addition pattern 1 is defined so that the addition number "30" is displayed on the 2nd round (see FIG. 12). In the center of the screen of the display area 4A, after the additional character 702A is displayed, the additional number 703A of "+30" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (D), when the 3rd round is started, the planned number of prize balls "270" is added to the additional number 703A of "+30" displayed in the previous round in the display column 705. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is specified that the addition number is not displayed in the 3rd round (see FIG. 12), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 3Rth.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (E), when the 4th round is started, the large addition pattern 1 is defined so that the addition number "105" is displayed on the 4th round (see FIG. 12). In the center of the screen of the display area 4A, after the additional character 702A is displayed, the additional number 703B of "+105" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (F), when the 5th round is started, the planned number of prize balls "375" is added to the additional number 703B of "+105" displayed in the previous round in the display column 705. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is specified that the addition number is not displayed at the 5th R (see FIG. 12), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed at the center of the screen at the 5R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (G), when the 6th round is started, the same planned number of prize balls “375” as in the previous round is continuously displayed in the display column 705. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is specified that the addition number is not displayed at the 6th R (see FIG. 12), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed at the center of the screen at the 6R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (H), when the 7th Rth is started, the large addition pattern 1 is defined so that the addition number "270" is displayed on the 7th Rth (see FIG. 12). In the center of the screen of the display area 4A, after the additional character 702A is displayed, the additional number 703C of "+270" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (I), when the 8th round is started, the planned number of prize balls "645" is added to the additional number 703C of "+270" displayed in the previous round in the display column 705. Is added and displayed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 42 (I) and 42 (J), the “prize ball increase zone” is displayed in the display column 706 of the 8th to 16th rounds. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is specified that the addition number is not displayed from the 8th R to the 16R (see FIG. 12), in the 8R to 16R, the addition character 702A and the addition number are displayed in the center of the screen. It is not displayed, and in the display column 705, it is displayed that the planned number of prize balls has finally reached "645". Due to the series of display of the number of additional prizes and the number of planned prize balls, the player cannot substantially generate an over prize in the first half round, but in the second half round with the number of planned prize balls displayed in addition as a guide. You can proceed with the game while expecting the over-prize of the game, and you can enhance the interest of the game as well as the directing effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 43A, when the small additional bonus 2 corresponding to the hit pattern 6 is determined as the additional bonus and the small additional pattern 5 is selected as the additional pattern, the display area 4A in the hit start interval On the screen, an image 700 indicating the start of the additional bonus is displayed, and an image 701 prompting a right-handed hit is displayed. At this time, for example, an additional character 702B of "animal" selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 showing the initial value "+240" of the planned number of prize balls is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 43B, when the 1st round is started, the display fields 704 to 706 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In the 1st round, the "animal" corresponding to the additional character 702B is displayed in the display column 704. Even in the small addition pattern 5, it is stipulated that the number of additions is not displayed in the 1st round (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in the 1st round, only the initial value "240" is displayed in the display field 705 and the screen The number of additions is not displayed in the center.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 43B and 43C, the "additional specialization zone" is displayed in the display column 706 of the 1st to 7th rounds. Further, in the small addition pattern 5, since it is specified that the addition number is not displayed from the 1Rth to the 7th R (see FIG. 12), in the 1R to 7Rth, the addition character 702B and the addition number are displayed in the center of the screen. It is not displayed, and the planned number of prize balls is continuously displayed in the display field 705 without changing from the initial value "240".

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (D), when the 8th round is started, the "additional bonus" is displayed in the display column 706. Further, in the small addition pattern 5, since the addition number "135" is specified to be displayed on the 8th R (see FIG. 12), after the addition character 702B is displayed in the center of the screen of the display area 4A. , The additional number 703D of "+135" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 43 (E), when the 9th round is started, the "prize ball increase zone" is displayed in the display column 706. Further, in the display column 705, the planned number of prize balls "375" including the additional number 703D of "+135" displayed in the previous round is additionally displayed. Further, in the small addition pattern 5, since it is specified that the addition number is not displayed after the 9th R (see FIG. 12), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed in the center of the screen after the 9R. In the display column 705, it is displayed that the planned number of prize balls has finally reached "375". Even with such a series of display of the number of additional prizes and the planned number of prize balls, the player is not able to generate an over-prize until a part of the second half round (from the 1st round to the 13th round), but the additional prizes are displayed. With the planned number of prize balls as a guide, the game can be advanced while expecting over-winning until the final round (16R), and the interest of the game can be enhanced along with the directing effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), when the non-addition bonus according to the hit pattern 7 is determined as the addition bonus and the non-addition pattern 1 is selected as the addition pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval is selected. An image 700 indicating the start of the additional bonus is displayed above, and an image 701 prompting a right-handed hit is displayed. At this time, for example, an additional character 702C of "female" selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 showing the initial value "+240" of the planned number of prize balls is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), when the 1st round is started, display fields 704 to 706 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In the 1st round, the "female" corresponding to the additional character 702C is displayed in the display column 704. In the no-addition pattern 1, the number of additions is not displayed in all rounds including the 1st round (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in the 1st round, the initial value "240" is displayed in the display column 705. The number of additions is not displayed in the center of the screen.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 44 (B) to (D), in the 1st to 16th rounds, the additional character 702B and the number of additional characters are not displayed in the center of the screen, and the planned number of prize balls is initially displayed in the display column 705. It is continuously displayed without changing from the value "240". As shown in FIGS. 44 (C) and 44 (D), the "additional bonus" is simply displayed in the display column 706 after the 8th round.

The additional characters may be made to appear according to the operation of the effect button, and the number of additional characters may be displayed after the appearance. Further, the additional character appearing after the 8th R and the additional character appearing before the 7th R may have different appearances, for example, even if they are the same person. As a numerical value to be displayed, when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, "+15" corresponding to the number of prize balls may be displayed, and the number of payouts or the number of scheduled payouts may be cumulatively displayed. Further, regarding the planned number of prize balls, the expected numerical value may not be directly displayed, but may be indirectly suggested by, for example, light or sound. In the "additional bonus", the addition display of the planned prize balls is performed in the next round of the round in which the additional number is displayed, but in the same round, the addition display of the planned prize balls and the display of the additional number are displayed. And may be performed, or the planned number of prize balls may be added and displayed in the next round after the round in which the additional number is displayed.

[Effect of the game machine of the first embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, during the inter-round interval time during which the large winning opening 37 is closed, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number of winnings in the next round game is suppressed by the suppression unit 430 (large winning opening shutter). The time is controlled so that it flows into the upper surface of 37A). Specifically, in the interval patterns b to d, the time is controlled so that two or more game balls can pass through the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A at the same time. As a result, when the large winning opening shutter 37A is changed from the closed state of the inter-round interval to the open state according to the start of the round game, the number of game balls that flow into the large winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state is larger than the specified number of winning balls. Is led to the big winning opening 37, so that it is possible to realize an over-winning in a predetermined round game, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the big hit game state.

Further, by appropriately controlling the time of the interval between rounds in which the large winning opening 37 is closed between the desired round games without changing the opening time of the large winning opening shutter 37A. The number of over prizes can be adjusted as appropriate. That is, specifically, with respect to the inter-round interval, the big hit game state of the hit pattern 7 having a relatively short time (interval pattern a) and the hit patterns 2 to have a longer time (interval patterns b to d). By providing the jackpot game state of 6, the number of prize balls given based on the over prize can be made different according to the time of the interval between rounds, and the difference in the degree of advantage can be obtained for a plurality of jackpot game states. Can be attached.

In addition, the number of prize balls given each time a game ball wins in the large prize opening 37, the number of times the round game is executed, and the over-winning that will win the large winning opening 37 according to the time of the interval between rounds. The planned number of prize balls in the jackpot game state can be calculated in advance based on the estimated number of prizes including the number, and the planned number of prize balls can be notified as an additional number or an initial value. As for whether the number of prize balls can be obtained, it is possible to notify the novel contents rich in unexpectedness and variety, and by extension, it is possible to enhance the interest in the big hit game state.

In the first embodiment, the over-winning is basically realized by adjusting the time of the interval between rounds after the 7th round, but for example, by setting the time of the hit start interval to a relatively long time. Over winning may be possible from the 1st round.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 60. The same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

[Game machine specifications]
First, the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 45. As shown in FIG. 45, the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the jackpot game state is 1 / 399.60 (164/65536) in the low probability state (non-probability variable game state), and in the high probability state (probability variable game state). ) Is 1 / 130.54 (502/65536). The small hit probability of the special symbol in the small hit game state is 1 / 299.25 (219/65536) in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. As for the digestion order of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery by the second special symbol is prioritized for digestion. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation game state), the ST game state in which the probability variation game state continues up to 180 times is implemented.

The distribution of special symbols is as follows. In the jackpot symbol "Probability change 1" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 1, and 16R (of which the actual number of rounds that are easy to win in the jackpot is 7R) is given as the number of rounds of the round game, and the production mode of the jackpot game state. The bonus name shown is "normal bonus", and the bonus content is "7R bonus". In this "normal bonus", the estimated number of winnings in the 1st to 7th rounds is 10 and the estimated number of winnings in the 8th to 16th rounds is 0 for winning the large winning opening 37. As a result, in the "normal bonus", the planned number of prize balls is 1050. The probability (rush rate) of "probability variation 1" as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is set to 100/100.

In the big hit symbol "Probability change 1" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 2, the number of rounds is 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "Big addition bonus", and the bonus content is "Big addition". It is a "bonus". In this "large addition bonus", the estimated number of winnings in the 1st to 7th rounds is 10, and the estimated number of winnings in the 8th to 16th rounds is 12. As a result, the planned number of prize balls is 2670 in the "large addition bonus". The probability (rush rate) of "probability variation 1" as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is set to 50/100.

In the jackpot symbol "Probability 2" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 3, the number of rounds is 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "Middle addition bonus 1", and the bonus content is "Medium". It is an additional bonus 1 ". In "Middle addition bonus 1", the estimated number of winnings in the 1st to 7th rounds is 10, and the estimated number of winnings in the 8th to 16th rounds is 11. As a result, the planned number of prize balls is 2,535 in the "Middle addition bonus 1". The probability (rush rate) of "probability variation 2" as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

In the jackpot symbol "Probability 3" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 4, the number of rounds is 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "Middle addition bonus 2", and the bonus content is "Medium". It is an additional bonus 2 ". In "Middle addition bonus 2", the estimated number of winnings in the 1st to 11th rounds is 10, the estimated number of winnings in the 12th round is 11, and the estimated number of winnings in the 13th to 16th rounds is 12. As a result, the planned number of prize balls is 2,535 in the "Middle addition bonus 2". The probability (rush rate) of "probability variation 3" as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is set to 5/100.

In the big hit symbol "Probability 4" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 5, the number of rounds is 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "small addition bonus", and the bonus content is "small addition". It is a "bonus". The estimated number of winnings for the 1st to 16th rounds of the "small addition bonus 1" is 10. As a result, the planned number of prize balls is 2,400 in the "small addition bonus". The probability (rush rate) of "probability variation 4" as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is set to 35/100.

The small hit has the same contents as the small hit according to the first embodiment described above, except that the hit pattern 6 corresponds to it.

The large winning opening count number corresponds to the specified winning number that triggers the end of one round game, and in the present embodiment, the large winning opening count number (specified winning number) is set to "10". That is, when 10 winnings to the large winning opening 37 are counted in one round, the round is terminated. Also in this embodiment, the number of large winning openings (specified number of winnings) does not set the upper limit of the number of winnings in one round. That is, even if a prize exceeding the number of large prize openings is detected during one round, the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prizes is paid out. As a result, it is possible to over-win a prize that exceeds the number of large winning openings. This point will be described later.

The time saving performance, the number of prize balls corresponding to the starting opening and each winning opening, the winning probability of the normal symbol, the number of winning symbols of the normal symbol, and the number of winning counts of the second starting opening are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The specifications of the present embodiment may also have the following contents. For example, for special symbols, the jackpot probability at low probability and high probability is not limited to the above. That is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be such that the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high probability than in the low probability. The small hit probability is not limited to the above. For example, it may be a specification in which the winning probability of the other special symbol is higher than that of one special symbol. Regarding the digestion order of the special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be set in the winning order without setting the priority order, or the first special symbol may be preferentially digested. The number of STs in which the probabilistic gaming state (ST gaming state) continues is not limited to the above. In addition, the probabilistic game state may continue until the next big hit. The number of rounds is not limited to the above, and a number of rounds other than 16R may be provided. The actual number of rounds may be the same as the number of regular rounds. The type of jackpot symbol is not limited to the above. For example, the types of jackpot symbols of the first special symbol may be increased. Further, the additional bonus may be executed even in the big hit game state based on the first special symbol. In the present embodiment, the number of large winning openings (specified number of winnings) is set to "10", but the number is not limited to this. For example, the number of winning openings may be set to 11 or more or less than 9. The time saving performance may be larger than the number of STs (the number of games in the probabilistic game state), or may be less than the number of STs including, for example, 0 times. The number of prize balls is not limited to those described above. For example, if the number of prize balls related to the large prize opening is set to a value different from the above, the planned number of prize balls is calculated using the value and the estimated number of prizes, and the number of additional prizes described later is notified. Can be done. With respect to ordinary symbols, the hit probabilities at low probability and high probability are not limited to those described above. For example, the winning probability of a normal symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win at a high probability than at a low probability, and for example, it may be won at a low probability. The number of hit symbols of ordinary symbols is not limited to those described above, and may be, for example, two or more. In the case of two or more, it is preferable that the opening patterns of the blade members are associated with each other so as to be different. The number of winning counts for the second starting port may be a value other than those described above.

[1 round opening / closing pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening in one round will be described.

As shown in FIG. 46, five types of opening / closing patterns A to E are defined as the one-round opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening 37. The opening / closing patterns A to E are opening / closing patterns corresponding to the big hit gaming state, and the opening / closing pattern E among them is an opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit gaming state. The opening / closing pattern A and the opening / closing pattern E of the present embodiment are the same as the opening / closing pattern A and the opening / closing pattern C of the first embodiment, but the opening / closing patterns B to D of the present embodiment are different from those of the first embodiment. Unlike this, it is stipulated that the game is opened a plurality of times (twice in the present embodiment) in one round game.

The opening / closing pattern B is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state first becomes 5.21 s, then the closed state becomes 2.64 s, then the open state becomes 3.00 s, and then the final closed state is reached. The opening / closing pattern B is defined as a round section from the first opening state to the final closing state. The section where the open state is 5.21s or 3.00s is shorter than the long opening of the opening / closing pattern A, and therefore corresponds to the middle opening. The section that is closed for 2.64 s between the two middle openings is referred to as the "interround interval" in the following description. That is, in the opening / closing pattern B, two middle openings occur with an interval during the round, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern B is 8.21 s.

The opening / closing pattern C is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state first becomes 5.21 s, then the closed state becomes 1.98 s, then the open state becomes 3.00 s, and then the final closed state is reached. The opening / closing pattern C is also defined as a round section from the first opening state to the final closing state. In such an opening / closing pattern C, two middle openings occur with an interval during the round in between, but the time of the interval during the round is shorter than that of the opening / closing pattern B. The total opening time of the opening / closing pattern C is 8.21s, which is the same as that of the opening / closing pattern B.

The opening / closing pattern D is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state first becomes 5.21 s, then the closed state becomes 1.32 s, then the open state becomes 3.00 s, and then the final closed state is reached. The opening / closing pattern D is also defined as a round section from the first opening state to the final closing state. In such an opening / closing pattern D, two middle openings occur with an interval during the round in between, but the time of the interval during the round is shorter than that of the opening / closing pattern C. The total opening time of the opening / closing pattern D is 8.21s, which is the same as that of the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern C.

In the actual round game in the jackpot game state, among the above-mentioned opening / closing patterns A to E, the round game when the opening / closing is controlled based on the opening / closing patterns A to D including the long opening or the middle opening in which the game ball can be won. Applicable. The round game when the opening / closing is controlled based on the opening / closing pattern E is a non-substantial round game that does not correspond to the real round game.

The opening / closing pattern for one round may have the following contents. The opening pattern is not limited to the above five types, and may be four or less types or six or more types. Further, regarding the opening / closing pattern A, the opening time may not be 10s but may be, for example, less than 10s or more than 10s, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can win a prize. Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of the opening / closing patterns B to D, the opening / closing patterns are opened twice in one round, but the opening / closing patterns may be opened three times or more. The middle opening time in the opening / closing patterns B to D may be any time as long as a predetermined number of game balls can win a prize. Further, for the opening / closing patterns B to D, the middle opening times may be different from each other. The opening time of the middle opening can be appropriately set according to the time of the interval between rounds and the interval during the round. Regarding the opening / closing pattern E, the opening time may not be 0.1 s, but may be, for example, less than 0.1 s or more than 0.1 s. Further, it may be opened a plurality of times instead of opening only once in one round.

[Large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit game state and the small hit game state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 47, a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 6 are defined as the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern). As the pattern of the interval between rounds, only the interval pattern a in which the closing time is 0.3 s is defined. The hit pattern 1 occurs at the time of the normal bonus, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is 7R. The hit pattern 1 is defined so that the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st to 7th rounds, and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern E in the 8th to 16th rounds. That is, the hit pattern 1 stipulates that the actual rounds are the 7 rounds of the 1st to 7th rounds, and the remaining 9 rounds of the 8th to 16th rounds are executed as non-substantial rounds.

The hit pattern 2 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of a large addition bonus and the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are defined as 16R. The hit pattern 2 is defined so that the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st to 7th rounds, and the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in the 8th to 16th rounds. In the large addition bonus that is executed as a production together with the winning pattern 2, the number of prize balls based only on the number of large prize openings (specified number of prizes: 10) is 2400, but the planned number of prize balls including over prizes is It becomes 2670. Therefore, in the large addition bonus, "2100" corresponding to the number of prize balls for 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and the number "570" corresponding to the difference between this initial value and the planned number of prize balls is added in the first half round. It is designed to be notified as a number.

The hit pattern 3 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the medium addition bonus 1 and the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are defined as 16R. The hit pattern 3 is defined so that the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st to 7th rounds, and the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern C in the 8th to 16th rounds. In the middle addition bonus 1 executed as a production together with the hit pattern 3, the number of prize balls based on the specified number of prizes is 2400, but the planned number of prize balls including the over prize is 2535. Therefore, even in the middle addition bonus 1, "2100" corresponding to the number of prize balls for 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and "435" corresponding to the difference between this initial value and the planned number of prize balls is set in the first half round. It is designed to be notified as an additional number.

The hit pattern 4 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the medium addition bonus 2 and the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are defined as 16R. In the hit pattern 4, the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1R to 7R rounds, the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern D in the 8R to 11R rounds, and the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern D in the 12R round. It is stipulated that the opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern C, and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in the 13th to 16th rounds. In the middle addition bonus 2 executed as a production together with the hit pattern 4, the number of prize balls based on the specified number of prizes is 2400, but the planned number of prize balls including the over prize is 2535. Therefore, in the middle addition bonus 2, "2100" corresponding to the number of prize balls for 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and "435" corresponding to the difference between this initial value and the planned number of prize balls is the first half round or In the latter half of the round, it will be notified as an additional number.

The hit pattern 5 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of a small addition bonus and the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are defined as 16R. The hit pattern 5 is defined so that the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st to 7th rounds, and the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern D in the 8th to 16th rounds. In the small addition bonus executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 5, the number of prize balls based on the specified number of prizes is 2400, and over prizes are not detected. That is, the planned number of prize balls is also 2400. Therefore, in the small addition bonus, "2100" corresponding to the number of prize balls for 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and "300" corresponding to the difference between this initial value and the planned number of prize balls is added in the first half round. It is designed to be notified as a number.

The hit pattern 6 is defined so that it occurs in the small hit game state and the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern E only once. That is, the hit pattern 6 is executed as a hit pattern in which the possibility of winning the game ball with respect to the large winning opening 37 is extremely low.

The hit pattern may have the following contents. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, on the premise that the game balls are continuously fired, the opening / closing patterns B to D are set to the interval during the round, but the time when the game ball launch operation is started is set. As a reference, the time of the interval during the round may be specified. For example, as the time of the interval during the round, a time corresponding to a predetermined number of assumed maximum arrival times may be specified with reference to the time of the first middle opening and the time of starting the firing operation. In addition, when it is difficult for over-winning to occur, the time of the interval during the round corresponding to this is large in the number of winnings in the round (the number of winnings detected in the first open state) and the interval in the round. It is preferable that the total number of game balls assumed to exist on the winning opening shutter is equal to or less than the specified number of winnings, and if the situation is such that over-winning is likely to occur, the corresponding interval during the round. The time is the specified number of winnings, which is the sum of the number of winnings during the round (the number of winnings detected in the first open state) and the number of game balls that are assumed to exist on the large winning opening shutter at the interval during the round. It is preferable that the time exceeds. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which over-winning is easy or difficult depending on the time of the interval during the round. For example, in the present embodiment, 2.64s, which is the maximum time of the interval during a round, is defined as a time during which 12 prizes (2 over prizes) can be achieved per round, but 13 per round. It may be the time when the above prizes can be won. However, as the number of over prizes increases, the interval time during the round tends to be unnaturally long, so it is preferable to set an appropriate time. Further, the hit pattern 1 may be assigned the same opening / closing pattern to all of the rounds, or may have different opening / closing patterns only in a part of the rounds. As the hit pattern, the interval between rounds may be different. Regarding the hit patterns 2 to 5, the opening / closing patterns may be different in some or all rounds. Further, the hit patterns 2 to 5 may have different intervals between some rounds.

[Additional pattern selection table]
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an additional pattern selection table. This additional pattern selection table is a table referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 55) of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The addition pattern selection table is a table for selecting an addition pattern as a hit effect pattern, which will be described later, according to the hit patterns 2 to 5. The additional pattern selection table is provided for each of the winning patterns 2 to 5, and defines various additional patterns to be determined and a selection rate (%) when selecting the additional pattern by lottery.

According to the additional pattern selection table (hit pattern 2) associated with the hit pattern 2, the large additional patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the additional patterns corresponding to the large additional bonus. According to the addition pattern selection table (hit pattern 3) associated with the hit pattern 3, the middle addition patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the addition pattern corresponding to the middle addition bonus 1. According to the addition pattern selection table (hit pattern 4) associated with the hit pattern 4, the middle addition patterns 5 to 9 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the addition pattern corresponding to the middle addition bonus 2. According to the additional pattern selection table (hit pattern 5) associated with the hit pattern 5, the small additional patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the additional patterns corresponding to the small additional bonus.

The selection rate for sorting the additional pattern, which is a decision item in the additional pattern selection table, is not limited to that shown in FIG. 48. In the addition pattern selection table, the number of patterns of the addition patterns may be the same, or all may be different.

[Additional pattern table]
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an additional pattern table. This additional pattern table is a table referred to in the above-described sub CPU 71 in-round effect processing (see FIG. 37). The addition pattern table is a table for defining the number of additions for production and the round for notifying the additions according to the addition pattern. The additional pattern table is provided for each type of bonus, and defines the additional pattern and the number of rounds as reference items and the additional number as a decision item. In addition, also in this embodiment, the addition number is notified with the appearance of the addition character described later.

According to the addition pattern table (large addition bonus) corresponding to the large addition bonus, the number of rounds and the number of additional additions to be notified are defined for each of the large addition patterns 1 to 4 as the addition pattern. For example, in the large addition pattern 1, "100" is notified as the addition number in each of the 1st, 3rd, and 5th Rs, and "270" is notified as the addition number in the 7th R. The total number of these additions is "570".

According to the addition pattern table (middle addition bonus 1) corresponding to the middle addition bonus 1, the number of rounds and the number of notifications to be added are defined for each of the middle addition patterns 1 to 4 as the addition pattern. For example, in the middle addition pattern 1, "100" is notified as the addition number in each of the 1st, 3R, and 5R, and "135" is notified as the addition number in the 7R. The total number of these additions is "435".

According to the addition pattern table corresponding to the middle addition bonus 2 (middle addition bonus 2), the number of rounds and the number of notifications to be added are defined for each of the middle addition patterns 5 to 9 as the addition pattern. For example, in the middle addition pattern 5, "100" is notified as the addition number in each of the 1st, 3rd, and 5Rths, and "30" is notified as the addition number in each of the 8th to 10Rths, and the 11th Rth. "45" is notified as an additional number. The total number of these additions is "435".

According to the addition pattern table (small addition bonus) corresponding to the small addition bonus, the number of rounds and the number of notifications to be added are defined for each of the small addition patterns 1 to 4 as the addition pattern. For example, in the small addition pattern 1, "100" is notified as the number of additions in each of the 1st, 3rd, and 5th Rs. The total number of these additions is "300".

The numerical value for distributing the additional number in the additional pattern table is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 49, and the additional number (570, 435, 300) obtained from the difference between the planned number of prize balls and the initial value is appropriately distributed. do it. Further, by notifying a numerical value exceeding the total additional number as an additional number and then setting a numerical value to be notified to be subtracted, the total additional number may be finally determined. ..

[Additional character lottery table]
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an additional character lottery table. The additional character lottery table is a table referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 55) of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The additional character lottery table is a table for selecting an additional character to appear at the start of the additional bonus or at the time of notifying the number of additional characters according to the additional pattern by lottery. The additional character lottery table defines various additional patterns as reference items, additional characters as determination items, and a selection rate (%) when selecting additional characters by lottery. "Animal", "female", and "fireworks master" are defined as additional characters.

For example, in the large addition patterns 1 to 4, it is defined that the selection rate of the addition character of "fireworks master" is the highest. In the middle addition patterns 1 to 9, the selection rate of the addition characters of "female" and "fireworks master" is generally high, and the selection rate of the addition characters of "animal" is generally low. In the small addition patterns 1 to 4, the selection rate of the addition character of "animal" is high, the selection rate of the addition character of "female" is high, and the selection rate of the addition character of "fireworks master" is low as a whole. It is stipulated. The additional characters that appear based on such an additional character lottery table suggest the type of bonus, and the number of additional characters that are notified at the same time as the appearance of the additional characters also raises expectations for the prize ball. be able to.

The selection rate for sorting the additional characters in the additional character lottery table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 50. For various additional characters, an additional pattern that cannot be selected may be specified. For example, the addition character of "animal" cannot be selected only in the large addition pattern, and the addition character of "fireworks master" can be selected only in the medium addition pattern or the large addition pattern. You may.

[Control by main CPU and sub CPU]
Next, the processes executed by the main CPU 61 and the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. Regarding the same processing as that according to the first embodiment, only the drawing numbers and step numbers are appropriately described, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The processing of the main CPU 61 in the present embodiment includes main processing, timer interrupt processing, switch input processing, special symbol-related switch check processing, first start port switch check processing, second start port switch check processing, and large winning port switch. Check processing, special symbol control processing, special symbol memory check processing, special symbol determination processing, special symbol fluctuation time management processing, special symbol display time management processing, and special symbol game end processing are performed in FIGS. 14 to 26 according to the first embodiment. Since it is the same as that shown in FIG. 31, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Hit start interval management process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. In this hit start interval management process, the processes of S350 to S360 are performed as the same processes as those of S200 to S210 shown in FIG. 27 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, in S360, the main CPU 61 sets data corresponding to any of the opening / closing patterns A to E as the data during the opening of the large winning opening.

[Waiting time management process before reopening the big prize opening]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which is executed by the main CPU 61. The waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening is the same process as S220 to S227 shown in FIG. 28 according to the first embodiment, and the processes S370 to S377 are performed. In the present embodiment, in S377, the main CPU 61 sets data corresponding to any of the opening / closing patterns A to E as the data during the opening of the large winning opening.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a process during opening of the large winning opening executed by the main CPU 61. The process during opening of the large winning opening is the process of S380 to S392, which is substantially the same as the process of S230 to S242 shown in FIG. 29 according to the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes of S381, S382, and S387 are as follows.

In S381, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S384. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening winning counter is not "10" or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S382.

In S382, the main CPU 61 executes the big winning opening opening / closing process according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round in the big hit type and the current round. According to this process, when the opening / closing patterns B to D are set, an in-round interval that is closed during the round occurs. As a result, over-winning is realized in which the actual number of winnings is larger than the specified number of winnings by using the interval during the round. In S382, the large winning opening opening / closing process according to the opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit is also executed.

In S387, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63. In the present embodiment, the interval display time between rounds is always set to the time corresponding to the interval pattern a.

[Hit end interval management process]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit end interval management process is the same as that of S250 to S256 shown in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment, and the processes of S400 to S406 are performed. However, in S405, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "180" as the number of STs in the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63.

As the processing of the sub CPU 71 in the present embodiment, the main processing, the command reception interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing, the command analysis processing, and the in-round effect processing are shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 and 37 according to the first embodiment. Since it is the same as the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Hit effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit effect pattern determination process is the same as that of S320 to S328 shown in FIG. 36 according to the first embodiment, and the processes of S410 to S418 are performed. In this embodiment, the processes of S410, S411, S414, and S417 are as follows.

In S410, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets any of "01H" to "06H" in the hit effect pattern flag according to the stop symbol designation information of the special symbol included in the received hit start display command. Regarding the hit effect pattern flag, "01H" corresponds to the normal bonus, each of "02H" to "05H" corresponds to the large addition bonus, the medium addition bonus 1, 2, and the small addition bonus, and "06H" , Corresponds to small hits. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S411.

In S411, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "02H" to "05H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an additional bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "02H" to "05H", the process is transferred to S412. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is neither "02H" to "05H", the process is transferred to S418.

In S414, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value corresponding to the selected additional pattern in the additional pattern flag. In the present embodiment, 17 additional patterns are provided, and the additional pattern flags "01H" to "01H" to each of the large additional patterns 1 to 4, the medium additional patterns 1 to 9, and the small additional patterns 1 to 4 are provided. "11H" corresponds. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S415.

In S417, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "2100" in the prize ball number counter. This value of "2100" corresponds to the number of prize balls that will be paid out according to 14R of the 16R round game, and is displayed as the initial value of the planned number of prize balls at the hit start interval. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is terminated.

[Hit end production process]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit end effect process is the same as that of S340 to S344 shown in FIG. 38 according to the first embodiment, and the processes of S420 to S424 are performed. In this embodiment, the processes of S420 and S422 are as follows.

In S420, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "02H" to "05H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the addition bonus has ended based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "02H" to "05H", the process is transferred to S421. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is neither "02H" to "05H", the process is transferred to S422.

In S422, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting end effect data according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data at the end of the round game. At this time, as the end effect data, data of different effect contents is set according to any of the normal bonus, the additional bonus, and the small hit. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S423.

[Example of operation when over-winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59, an operation example when an over-winning occurs at the large winning opening 37 will be described.

57 and 58 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the large winning opening shutter 37A when an over winning occurs. Note that FIGS. 57 and 58 schematically show the behavior from the inter-round interval immediately before the 7R to the 7th R in the large addition bonus, and after the end of the 7R, the inter-round interval is passed again to the 8th R. Further, the game balls are continuously fired and reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A (in the open state, the right end portion of the corresponding large winning opening 37) after a uniform 3.1 s elapse. .. Each game ball is ordered in the order of launch (1), (2), ... Or (1'), (2'), ..., but for convenience, when the round is switched, (1) or (1) or (1) The order is given in order from').

First, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the large winning opening shutter 37A closes the large winning opening 37 at the interval between rounds immediately before the start of the 7th round. The time of the interval between rounds is shorter than the time of 0.66 s, which corresponds to the approximate firing interval at which the game ball first reaches the right end portion of the large prize opening shutter 37A after the large winning opening shutter 37A is closed (book). Since it is 0.3 s) in the embodiment, the game ball has not reached the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), the 7th round starts when the inter-round interval time elapses, and the large winning opening shutter 37A opens the large winning opening 37 by retracting in the direction of the white arrow. Make it a state. Even at this point, the game ball has not reached the right end of the grand prize opening 37.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), for example, the game ball (1) launched at the interval between rounds is near the right end of the large winning opening 37 which is opened along the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 (not shown). It rolls up to.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), the game ball (1) passes through the open large winning opening 37 and falls downward, and the winning is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370. .. That is, the winning prize corresponding to the first of the specified winning number "10" is detected. After that, the game balls (2) to (9) (not shown) pass through the large winning opening 37 and fall downward every 0.66s of the firing interval, and the winnings are sequentially detected by the large winning opening count switch 370. The Rukoto.

Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), the next game ball (10) also passes through the open large winning opening 37 and falls downward, and the winning is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370. Will be done. As a result, when the winning prize corresponding to the end of the specified number of winnings "10" is detected, the 7th round ends and the inter-round interval before the start of the 8th round starts. At this time, approximately 9.8 s have passed since the start of the firing operation of the game ball (1). The time of 9.8 s is 3.1 s when the first game ball (1) reaches the part corresponding to the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A, and this game ball (1) is the large winning opening count switch 370. It is obtained from the sum of the time 0.1 s detected by the above and the firing interval of 0.66 s × 10 as the time required to launch the 10 game balls (1) to (10). Therefore, in the 7th round, which is in the open state for a maximum of 10 seconds, the winning of 10 game balls (1) to (10) can be sufficiently detected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), when the inter-round interval is started again, the large winning opening shutter 37A projects in the direction of the white arrow to close the large winning opening 37 again. To do. At this time, since the firing interval of the game balls is 0.66 s, the next game ball (1') has reached the vicinity of the right end of the closed large winning opening 37.

Then, when the inter-round interval time of 0.3 s elapses, the 8th round starts, and as shown in FIG. 58 (G), the large winning opening shutter 37A retracts in the direction of the white arrow to allow the large winning opening. The 37 is set to the open state. At this point, the game ball (1') has reached the portion corresponding to the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A, so that the game ball (1') passes through the open large winning opening 37. Then, it falls downward, and the winning is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (H), the game balls (2') to (7') and the game balls (8') (not shown) pass through the large winning opening 37 every 0.66 s of the firing interval. It falls downward, and the winnings are sequentially detected by the large winning opening count switch 370. The time when the game ball (8') is detected is calculated from the start time of the 8th round, and the time when the first game ball (1') is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370 is 0.26 s, which is 7 By setting the firing interval of the pieces of the game balls (2') to (8') to 0.66s x 7, it will be approximately 4.88s after the lapse. That is, in the 8th round, approximately eight game balls (1') to (8') are detected within the time (5.21 s) when the first middle is opened.

In such an 8th round, when the first middle opening time of 5.21 s elapses, as shown in FIG. 58 (I), the large winning opening shutter 37A temporarily closes the large winning opening 37 due to the interval during the round. It will be closed. Then, when 0.66 s has elapsed from the state of FIG. 58 (H), that is, approximately 5.54 s has elapsed from the start of the 8th round, the next game ball (9') has a large winning opening shutter. It reaches the rightmost part of 37A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (J), the large winning opening shutter 37A closes the large winning opening 37 until 2.64s, which is the time defined as the interval during the 8th round, elapses. During that time, on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A, the game balls (9') to (12') pass from the right side to the left side in a line. At this time, the game balls (9') to (12') sequentially reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A approximately every 0.66 seconds, and roll at a speed of further advancing 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. It will move. As a result, the four game balls (9') to (12') are positioned on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A with an interval of about one. In short, when counting from the state time of FIG. 58 (H), the state of FIG. 58 (J) is approximately 2.64 s after the lapse, and approximately 7.52 s after the start of the 8th round. That is, in the 8R round middle interval, four game balls (9') to (12') can be sufficiently present on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A by the end of the round.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (K), when the interval during the 8th round is completed, the second middle opening is performed, and the large winning opening shutter 37A retracts in the direction of the white arrow to cause the large winning opening 37. Is opened again. At this time, the game balls (9') to (12') are still passing at a relatively low speed on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A. As a result, the four game balls (9') to (12') pass through the open large winning opening 37 all at once and fall downward, and the large winning opening count switch 370 is used for four games. Winning is detected. That is, in the first middle opening in one round game, eight prizes are detected, and then in the middle opening immediately after the mid-round interval in the same round game, four prizes are detected. As a result, two over-winning prizes exceeding the prescribed number of winning prizes of 10 will occur. Similarly, if the time of the interval during the round is 1.98 s, for example, 12 + 1 over-winning occurs, and if it is 1.32 s, it can be easily understood that the over-winning does not occur.

FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining various operation timings related to the big winning opening, and shows the operation timings in the large addition bonus according to FIGS. 57 and 58. The "launch state", "game state", "time required", "large winning opening", "number of balls on the shutter", "elapsed time after the change in the number of balls on the shutter", and "illustrated state" are shown in the above-mentioned figures. It is the same as the item shown in 41.

As shown in FIG. 59, when the game balls are continuously fired, in the 7th round, the time when the first game ball (1) is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370 from the start time is approximately 0. 26s, the time required to launch the next nine game balls (2) to (10) is a firing interval of 0.66s x 9 = 5.94s, and the last game ball (10) is determined by the large winning opening count switch 370. Since the detection time is approximately 0.1 s, the opening time is about 6.3 s, which is the sum of these.

After that, the interval between rounds after the end of the 7th round starts, and the big winning opening 37 is closed again. At this time, the large winning opening 37 is closed for 0.3 s, but the next game ball (1') has not yet reached the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A, and the large winning opening shutter 37A There is no game ball on the upper surface of.

Then, when the 8th round starts and the first middle opening starts, approximately eight game balls (1') to (8') are detected within the specified 5.21 s time. This is because the time for the first game ball (1') to be detected by the large winning opening count switch 370 from the start of the 8th round is approximately 0.26 s, and the next seven game balls (2) to ( Since the time required for firing 8) is 0.66 s × 7 = 4.62 s, it is clear from the total time of these shots.

After that, the first middle opening is completed and the interval during the 8th round round starts. During this round interval, the large winning opening 37 is temporarily closed for 2.64s. At this time, the time for the next ninth game ball (9') to reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A from the start of the interval during the round is approximately 0.33 s, and the next three games Since the time required to launch the balls (10') to (12') is 0.66 s × 3 = 2.31 s, the four game balls (4 game balls) within the total time of 2.64 s. 9') to (12') are present on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A.

After that, when the interval during the 8th round is completed and the large winning opening 37 is opened again by the second opening of the middle, the four game balls (9') to (9') on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A. 12') will pass through the large winning opening 37, and four winnings will be detected. When the winning of one of the game balls is detected, the large winning opening 37 is closed, the 8th round ends, and the next round-to-round interval is started. That is, as the opening / closing pattern of the 8th round, a maximum of 8 prizes can be detected at the first middle opening, and a maximum of 4 prizes can be detected at the second middle opening. The time is defined as 2.64s, which makes it possible to win 10 + 2 over prizes for the 8th round as a whole. Similarly, by setting the time of the interval during the round to 1.98s, 10 + 1 over-winning is possible, and by setting the time of the interval during the round to 1.32s, the over-winning is not detected. There is. As described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of two over-winnings are realized mainly by appropriately setting the time of the interval during the round, but three or more over-winnings may be possible. However, when three or more over-winnings are possible, the longitudinal dimension of the large winning opening shutter 37A should be set to a length that allows at least four game balls to pass at the same time, or the time for opening the first middle is appropriately set. Is preferable.

[Example of screen display of additional bonus]
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of screen display of the additional bonus. The figure shows an example of screen display of an additional bonus corresponding to the large additional pattern 1.

First, as shown in FIG. 60A, when a large additional bonus corresponding to the hit pattern 2 is determined as the additional bonus and the large additional pattern 1 is selected as the additional pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval is selected. An image 700 indicating the start of the additional bonus is displayed above, and an image 701 prompting a right-handed hit is displayed. At this time, for example, an additional character 702A of "fireworks master" selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 showing the initial value "+2100" of the planned number of prize balls is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), when the 1st round is started, a display field 704 indicating the type of the additional character is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the planned number of prize balls is added for each addition of the additional characters. The display column 705 for displaying the addition and the display column 706 for displaying the period of the first half round as the "additional specialization zone" and the second half round as the "prize ball increase zone" are displayed. Such display columns 704 to 706 are displayed until the end of 16 rounds. For example, in the display column 704, the "fireworks master" corresponding to the additional character 702A is displayed until the end of 16 rounds. On the other hand, in the display field 705, after the additional number is displayed in the center of the screen, the planned number of prize balls to which the additional number is added is additionally displayed. In the large addition pattern 1, since the addition number "100" is specified to be displayed in the 1st round (see FIG. 49), after the addition character 702A is displayed in the center of the screen of the display area 4A, " The additional number 703A of "+100" is displayed. Further, in the display column 706, basically, the "additional special zone" is displayed from the 1st round to the 7th round, and the "prize ball increase zone" is displayed after the 8th round. As a result, the "additional special zone" is displayed in the display column 706 of the 1st R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), when the second round is started, the planned number of prize balls "2200" is added to the display column 705 by adding the additional number 703A of "+100" displayed in the previous round. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is specified that the addition number is not displayed in the 2nd round (see FIG. 49), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 2Rth.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), when the 3rd round is started, the large addition pattern 1 is defined so that the addition number "100" is displayed on the 3rd round (see FIG. 49). In the center of the screen of the display area 4A, after the additional character 702A is displayed, the additional number 703B of "+100" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), when the 4th round is started, the planned number of prize balls "2300" is added to the display column 705 by adding the additional number 703B of "+100" displayed in the previous round. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is specified that the addition number is not displayed in the 4th R (see FIG. 49), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 4Rth.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), when the 5th round is started, the large addition pattern 1 is defined so that the addition number "100" is displayed on the 5th round (see FIG. 49). In the center of the screen of the display area 4A, after the additional character 702A is displayed, the additional number 703C of "+100" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (G), when the 6th round is started, the planned number of prize balls "2400" is added to the additional number 703C of "+100" displayed in the previous round in the display column 705. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is specified that the addition number is not displayed at the 6th R (see FIG. 49), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed at the center of the screen at the 6R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), when the 7th Rth is started, the large addition pattern 1 is defined so that the addition number "270" is displayed on the 7th Rth (see FIG. 49). In the center of the screen of the display area 4A, after the additional character 702A is displayed, the additional number 703D of "+270" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (I), when the 8th round is started, the planned number of prize balls "2670" is added to the additional number 703D of "+270" displayed in the previous round in the display column 705. Is added and displayed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 60 (I) and 60 (J), the “prize ball increase zone” is displayed in the display column 706 of the 8th to 16th rounds. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is specified that the addition number is not displayed from the 8th R to the 16R (see FIG. 49), in the 8R to 16R, the addition character 702A and the addition number are displayed in the center of the screen. It is not displayed, and the display column 705 displays that the planned number of prize balls has finally reached "2670". Due to the series of display of the number of additional prizes and the number of planned prize balls, the player cannot substantially generate an over prize in the first half round, but in the second half round with the number of planned prize balls displayed in addition as a guide. You can proceed with the game while expecting the over-prize of the game, and you can enhance the interest of the game as well as the directing effect.

[Effect of the game machine of the second embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, in addition to the same effects as those of the first embodiment, the following effects can also be obtained.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, in a predetermined round game, game balls less than the specified number of winnings (10 pieces) are fired during the first middle opening time in which the large winning opening 37 is opened, and the large winning opening The time required to pass the shutter 37A, specifically, the time during which winning is detected for eight gaming balls is controlled, and then the large winning opening 37 is temporarily closed during the round interval. The time is controlled so that the time is set so that the three or four game balls, which are over-winning, flow into the suppression unit 430 (the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A) based on the previous eight balls. There is.

As a result, when the second middle opening is performed in the round game, a maximum of 12 game balls, which is larger than the specified number of winnings, will be large from the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A, including the case of the previous middle opening. You will be led to the winning opening 37. Therefore, it is possible to realize an over-winning in a predetermined round game, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the big hit game state.

Further, in a predetermined round game, the number of over prizes is appropriately adjusted by appropriately controlling the time of the interval during the round in which the large winning opening 37 is opened and closed a plurality of times and once closed. can do.

Further, the round game in which the over-prize is possible includes, for example, an opening / closing pattern D of a relatively short time for the interval time during the round without changing the time for first opening the middle opening of the large winning opening shutter 37A. By providing the jackpot game state of the hit pattern 5 and the jackpot game states of the hit patterns 2 and 3 including the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern C for a relatively long time, the number of over prizes can be increased according to the time of the interval during the round. The number of prize balls to be paid out can be made different based on the above, and the degree of advantage can be differentiated only by appropriately setting the interval time during the round for a plurality of jackpot game states.

In addition, the large prize opening 37 is awarded according to the number of prize balls given each time the game ball is won in the large winning opening 37, the number of times the round game is executed, the middle opening time, and the time of the interval during the round. The number of planned prize balls in the jackpot game state can be calculated in advance based on the estimated number of prizes including the number of over prizes, and the planned number of prize balls can be notified as an additional number or an initial value. It is possible to notify the unexpected and diverse contents of how many prize balls can be obtained in the state, and by extension, the interest in the big hit game state can be enhanced.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. The same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the specifications of the game machine of the third embodiment are almost the same as those of the first embodiment, but no small hit is provided, the specified number of prizes is 2, and the specified number of rounds is set to 3R. Has been done.

[1 round opening / closing pattern]
First, with reference to FIG. 61, an opening / closing pattern of a large winning opening in one round will be described.

As shown in FIG. 61, three types of opening / closing patterns A to C are defined as the one-round opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening 37. The opening / closing pattern A and the opening / closing pattern B of the present embodiment are the same as the opening / closing pattern A and the opening / closing pattern B of the first embodiment. The opening / closing pattern C of the present embodiment is similar to the opening / closing pattern C of the second embodiment, but the open state is first 0.6 s, then the closed state is 1.98 s, and then the open state is 3.00 s. It is an opening / closing pattern that finally becomes a closed state after becoming. This opening / closing pattern C is also defined as a round section from the first opening state to the final closing state. In such an opening / closing pattern C, a short opening occurs first, and then a second opening occurs as a middle opening with an interval during the round. The total opening time of the opening / closing pattern C is 3.6 s. All of the above-mentioned opening / closing patterns A to C correspond to the substantially round game in the jackpot game state.

[Large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit game state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 62, a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 4 are defined as the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern). As the pattern of the interval between rounds, an interval pattern a having a closing time of 0.3 s and an interval pattern b having a closing time of 2.97 s are defined. The hit pattern 1 corresponds to the additional bonus A, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are 3R. In the hit pattern 1, all the rounds from the 1st to the 3rd R are the opening / closing pattern A, and the interval between the rounds between the 1R and the 2R and the 2R and the 3R is the interval pattern a. It is stipulated. In such a hit pattern 1 (additional bonus A), two prizes equal to the specified number of prizes are detected in the 1st to 3rd rounds. As a result, the planned number of prize balls becomes 90 in the additional bonus A of the winning pattern 1.

The hit pattern 2 corresponds to the additional bonus B, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are defined as 3R. The hit pattern 2 is defined so that the 1st round is the opening / closing pattern A and the 2nd and 3rd rounds are the opening / closing pattern B. Further, the interval between rounds between the 1st and 2nd Rs and between the 2nd and 3rd Rs is defined to be an interval pattern b. In such a hit pattern 2 (additional bonus B), two prizes equal to the specified number of prizes are detected in the 1st round, while the interval between rounds before the start of the 2nd round and before the start of the 3rd round is relatively long. Since the interval pattern b is set to, 2 + 2 over prizes are detected in the 2nd and 3rd rounds. As a result, the planned number of prize balls becomes 150 in the additional bonus B of the winning pattern 2.

The hit pattern 3 corresponds to the additional bonus C, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are defined as 3R. The hit pattern 3 is defined so that the 1st round is the opening / closing pattern A and the 2nd and 3rd rounds are the opening / closing pattern C. Further, the interval between the rounds between the 1st and 2nd rounds and between the 2nd and 3rd rounds is defined to be the interval pattern a. In such a hit pattern 3 (additional bonus C), two prizes equal to the specified number of prizes are detected in the 1st round, while a round with a relatively long closing time (1.98) in the 2nd and 3rd rounds. Since the middle interval is provided, one prize is detected in the first open state in each of the 2nd and 3rd rounds, and then 1 + 2 over prizes are detected in the second open state after the end of the middle interval in the round. Will be done. As a result, in the additional bonus C of the winning pattern 3, the planned number of prize balls becomes 150.

The hit pattern 4 corresponds to the additional bonus D, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are defined as 3R. The hit pattern 3 is defined so that the 1st R is the opening / closing pattern A, the 2R is the opening / closing pattern B, and the 3R is the opening / closing pattern C. Further, the inter-round interval between the 1R and the 2R is defined as the interval pattern b, and the inter-round interval between the 2R and the 3R is defined as the interval pattern a. In such a hit pattern 4 (additional bonus D), two winnings equal to the specified number of winnings are detected in the 1st round, while the interval pattern b in which the interval between rounds before the start of the 2nd round is relatively long is used. Therefore, 2 + 2 over-winnings are detected in the 2nd round, and a relatively long closing time (1.98) during the round is provided in the 3rd round, so that in the first open state in the 3rd round. After one winning is detected, 1 + 2 over winnings are detected in the second open state after the end of the interval during the round. As a result, in the additional bonus D of the winning pattern 3, the planned number of prize balls becomes 150.

In the third embodiment, as in the hit pattern 4, a round (2R) in which 2 + 2 over prizes are realized by the interval between rounds and a round (3R) in which 1 + 3 over prizes are realized by the interval during the round. One feature is that the eyes) are mixed, but after defining at least one hit pattern having such contents, the specified number of rounds of all or part of the hit patterns may be different. Further, as the types of the interval between rounds and the interval during the round, more types may be provided according to the specifications.

[Table for selecting additional bonus production patterns]
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a table for selecting an additional bonus effect pattern. The additional bonus effect pattern selection table is a table for collectively determining an additional pattern, an additional character, and an additional number according to the type of the additional bonus as the effect content during the round. A table for selecting an additional bonus effect pattern is provided for each additional bonus A to D, and various decisions are made by lottery, such as the number of rounds as reference items, the additional pattern to be determined, the additional character, and the additional number. The selection rate (%) for selection is specified. In the hit start interval before the start of the 1st round of the additional bonus, the additional character appears and "60" is displayed as the initial value of the planned number of prize balls. Further, the additional bonus effect pattern selection table is referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (not shown), and in this hit effect pattern determination process, the additional pattern, the additional character, and the additional number are determined.

According to the additional bonus production pattern selection table (addition bonus A) associated with the additional bonus A, the additional patterns A-1 to A-4, "female" and "animal" corresponding to the additional bonus A are added characters. , And the additional number notified for each number of rounds is selected with a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the additional character of "female" is selected in the additional pattern A-1, the additional number "30" is notified in the 1st round, and the additional number is not notified in the 2nd and 3rd rounds. The number "90", which is the sum of the number of additions notified in this way and the initial value "60", is the planned number of winnings.

According to the additional bonus production pattern selection table (addition bonus B) associated with the additional bonus B, additional patterns B-1 to B-4, "fireworks master" and "female" corresponding to the additional bonus B are added. A character and an additional number notified for each number of rounds are selected with a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the additional character of "fireworks master" is selected in the additional pattern B-1, the additional number "30" is notified in each of the 1st to 3rd rounds. The numerical value "150", which is the sum of the number of additions notified in this way and the initial value "60", is the planned number of winnings.

According to the additional bonus production pattern selection table (additional bonus C) associated with the additional bonus C, the additional patterns C-1 to C-6, "fireworks", "female", and "additional bonus C" corresponding to the additional bonus C. An additional character of "animal" and an additional number notified for each number of rounds are selected with a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the additional character of "fireworks master" is selected in the additional pattern C-1, the additional number "30" is notified in the 1st round, the additional number "10" is notified in the 2nd round, and the additional character is notified in the 3rd round. The number "50" is notified. The numerical value "150", which is the sum of the number of additions notified in this way and the initial value "60", is the planned number of winnings.

According to the additional bonus production pattern selection table (additional bonus D) associated with the additional bonus D, the additional patterns D-1 to D-6, "fireworks", "female", and "additional bonus D" corresponding to the additional bonus D. An additional character of "animal" and an additional number notified for each number of rounds are selected with a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the additional character of "fireworks master" is selected in the additional pattern D-1, the additional number "30" is notified in the 1st round, the additional number "40" is notified in the 2nd round, and the additional character is notified in the 3rd round. The number "20" is notified. The numerical value "150", which is the sum of the number of additions notified in this way and the initial value "60", is the planned number of winnings.

The selection rate for allocating the addition pattern, the number of additions, etc., which are the determination items in the addition bonus effect pattern selection table, is not limited to that shown in FIG. 63. The additional bonus effect pattern selection table may be applied to the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above. The number of additions may be specified, for example, to be collectively notified in the 1st round. The initial value of the planned number of prize balls is set to "60" as an example, but by setting this initial value to, for example, "90", the additional number may not be notified in the additional bonus A.

[Effect of the game machine of the third embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, in addition to the same effects as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the following effects can also be obtained.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the round game of the opening / closing pattern C that can realize the over winning by controlling the time of the interval during the round and the over winning by controlling the time of the interval between rounds as the interval pattern b. Since the jackpot gaming state of the hit pattern 4 including both the round game of the feasible opening / closing pattern B can be provided, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the jackpot gaming state. Further, for example, a big hit game state in which an over-winning is possible by a round game (for example, the 3rd round) that is opened twice with an interval during the round, such as a hit pattern 3 or a hit pattern 4, and a hit pattern 2 , There is a big hit game state in which over-winning is possible even with only one round game (1R and 2R) that is opened only once. That is, in any of the big hit game states having the hit patterns 2 to 4, it is possible to realize an over-winning exceeding the specified number of prizes in one round game, so that the interest in the big hit game state can be further enhanced.

<First modification of the large winning opening shutter>
Next, a first modification of the large winning opening shutter will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. The same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.
[Specifications of the large winning opening shutter according to the first modification]
First, the specifications of the large winning opening shutter 37B according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 64. Also in FIG. 64, the positional relationship between the large winning opening shutter 37B (large winning opening 37) and the large winning opening count switch 370 is schematically shown as being different from FIG. 3 and the like for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 64, the large winning opening shutter 37B is formed so that the longitudinal dimension L1 is about d × 12 = 132 mm, for example, when the diameter d of the game ball is 11 mm. As a result, a maximum of 12 game balls can pass through the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B in the closed state at the same time. However, also in this modified example, the firing interval from the launch of one game ball to the launch of the next one game ball according to the start of the firing operation and the firing of one game ball are performed. By considering the arrival time from when the game ball is located at the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37B, a maximum of six game balls can be assumed to pass at the same time. Further, the maximum time until the game ball reaching the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37B is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370 is about 1.32 s, and the shortest time of the inter-round interpal is 1. It is set to be about .32 s (1.32 s or more may be used). As a result, it is possible to reliably detect the game ball that won the prize in the previous round game before the large prize opening 37 is opened again. Further, in the inter-round interpal, it is possible that a game ball exceeding the specified number of winnings cannot exist on the large winning opening shutter 37B. The time required for the large winning opening shutter 37B to move from one of the positions in which the large winning opening 37 is closed and the position in which the large winning opening 37 is opened from one of the positions to the other is determined by the above-described embodiment. Is similar to that of.

In applying such a large winning opening shutter 37B, the number of shots per minute is 90.90 pieces / minute, the firing interval is 0.66 seconds, and the firing preparation position is large, as in the above-described embodiment. It is assumed that it takes approximately 3.00 to 3.33 seconds to reach the right end portion of the winning opening shutter 37B. The upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B is an inclined surface such that the game ball advances by 11 mm in 0.33 seconds, that is, advances by 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. Other points are the same as those in the above-described embodiment. As a result, substantially, a maximum of six game balls can pass at the same time.

[Example of operation when over-winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66, an operation example when an over-winning occurs when the large winning opening shutter 37B is applied will be described.

65 and 66 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the large winning opening shutter 37B when an over winning occurs. Note that FIGS. 65 and 66 schematically show the behavior from the hit start interval to the start of the 1st to 4th rounds, but the interval between rounds and the opening time between each round are different from those according to the above-described embodiment. different. Each game ball is given an order such as (0), (1), ... In the order of launch, regardless of the update of the round. In addition, the prescribed number of prizes is set to "3" as an example.

First, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the large winning opening shutter 37B closes the large winning opening 37 at the hit start interval.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the 1st round starts when the specified time of the hit start interval elapses, and the large winning opening shutter 37B retracts in the direction of the white arrow to move the large winning opening 37. Make it open. Even at this point, the game ball has not reached the right end of the grand prize opening 37.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the game ball (1) launched after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the 1st round rolls to the vicinity of the right end of the open winning opening 37.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the game ball (1) passes through the open large winning opening 37 and falls downward, and the winning is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370. .. At this time, since the number of winnings in the 1st round has not yet reached the specified number of winnings "3", the large winning opening 37 continues to be open.

Then, when approximately 1.32 seconds have passed from the state of FIG. 65 (D), as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the third game ball (3) becomes a portion corresponding to the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37B. To reach. As a result, the winning of the game ball (3) is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370, and the large winning opening shutter 37B closes the large winning opening 37 accordingly, and the interval between rounds before the start of the 2nd round starts. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), when the big winning opening shutter 37B is in the state where the big winning opening 37 is completely closed during the interval between rounds before the start of the 2nd round, the game balls (4), ( 5) reaches the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37B and rolls from the right side to the left side along the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 65 (F) is approximately 1.32 s after the start of the inter-round interval.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), when the second round starts, the large winning opening shutter 37B opens the large winning opening 37. At this time, since the game balls (4) and (5) were in the passing state on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B, the two game balls (4) and (5) were opened. It passes through the large winning openings 37 all at once and falls downward, and the large winning opening count switch 370 detects two winnings. Further, the next game ball (6) has rolled to the vicinity of the right end of the large winning opening 37 which has been opened, and this game ball (6) will also be detected soon. As a result, the large winning opening shutter 37B closes the large winning opening 37 again, and the interval between rounds before the start of the 3rd round starts. Such a state of FIG. 65 (G) is approximately 1.72 s after the start of the inter-round interval, and 0.4 s after the start of the 2nd round.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (H), when the big winning opening shutter 37B is in a state where the big winning opening 37 is completely closed during the interval between rounds before the start of the 3rd round, the game balls (7) to 12) reaches the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37B and rolls from the right side to the left side along the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66 (H) is approximately 3.76 s after the start of the inter-round interval, and 4.02 s after counting from the state of FIG. 65 (G). In this way, in order to generate a state in which six game balls (7) to (12) are present on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B, the time of the interval between rounds before the start of the 3rd round is approximately 3 with a margin. It is set to about .96 s.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (I), when the 3rd round starts, the large winning opening shutter 37B opens the large winning opening 37. At this time, since the game balls (7) to (12) were present on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B, these six game balls (7) to (12) were opened. It passes through the large winning openings 37 all at once and falls downward, and the large winning opening count switch 370 detects six winnings. That is, immediately after the start of the 3rd round when the inter-round interval ends, 3 + 3 over prizes are detected. Such a state of FIG. 66 (I) is approximately 3.97 s after the start of the inter-round interval, in addition to the time required for opening and closing the large winning opening shutter 37B of 0.01 s.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (J), the large winning opening shutter 37B closes the large winning opening 37 again, and the interval between rounds before the start of the 4th round starts. After that, the game ball (13) reaches the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66 (J) is approximately 0.06 s after the start of the inter-round interval.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (K), when the big winning opening shutter 37B is in a state where the big winning opening 37 is completely closed during the interval between rounds before the start of the 4th round, the game balls (13) to (18) reaches the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37B and rolls from the right side to the left side along the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66 (K) is approximately 3.36 s after the start of the inter-round interval.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (L), when the 4th round starts, the large winning opening shutter 37B opens the large winning opening 37. At this time, on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B, the game balls (13) move outward from the left end and do not fall into the large winning opening 37, while the following game balls (14) to (18) are Since there is a game ball (19) that has just reached the right end of the big prize opening shutter 37B as well as being in the existing state, these six game balls (14) to (19) are in the open state. It passes through the mouths 37 all at once and falls downward, and the large prize opening count switch 370 detects six prizes. That is, even immediately after the start of the 4th round when the inter-round interval ends, 3 + 3 over prizes are detected. Such a state of FIG. 66 (L) is after 0.01 s has elapsed from the start of the 4th round to the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening shutter 37B, and approximately 3.97 s after the start of the inter-round interval. ..

[Effect of the game machine of the first modification]
In this way, over-winning can also be realized by appropriately setting the specified number of winnings and the time of the interval between rounds by using the large winning opening shutter 37B. For example, the large winning opening 37 is open until a certain amount of time has passed from the state of FIG. 66 (G) until the game ball (6) can be won, but from the state of FIG. 66 (G). It will be closed immediately, specifically, it will be closed about 0.1s from the start of the round, and then the big winning opening 37 will be closed once for a predetermined time as an interval during the round, and then opened again. You may do so. At this time, for example, if the interval time during the round is about 1.32 s, two game balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B during that time, and 2 + 2 over winnings can be realized. Can be done. If the interval time during the round is about 1.98 s, three game balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B during that time, and 2 + 3 over winnings can be realized. If the interval time during the round is about 2.64 s, four game balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B during that time, and 2 + 4 over winnings can be realized. Of course, the over-winning may be realized only by adjusting the time of the interval between rounds without providing the interval during the round.

<Second modification of the game board and variable winning device>
Next, a second modification of the game board and the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIG. 67. The same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

[Game board]
As shown in FIG. 67, the game board 1 includes a second large winning opening 37 capable of over-winning in the same manner as the large winning opening of the first embodiment described above, and a known first winning opening in which over-winning is difficult. It has a large winning opening 36. The first large winning opening 36 is provided in the upper part of the game area 1p. The first prize opening 36A is provided with a first prize opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the first prize opening 36. The first large winning opening shutter 36A is configured to open and close the first large winning opening 36 by tilting in the front-rear direction. Such a first prize opening shutter 36A has a first aspect in which the game ball easily passes through the passing region (first prize opening 36) and a second aspect in which the game ball is in a difficult closed state. It realizes a variable member that can be changed. Such a first big winning opening 36 is also opened in the big hit game state which is a game state advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that, as those having the same functions as those according to the above-described embodiment, the second large winning opening 37, the second large winning opening shutter 37A, the second large winning opening count switch 370, and the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A It is provided. Although not particularly shown, a first large winning opening count switch and a first large winning opening shutter solenoid are also provided as related to the first large winning opening 36 having the same functions as these. That is, when the winning of the game ball for the first big winning opening 36 is detected by the first big winning opening count switch, the payout device 83 pays out a preset number of game balls as a prize ball. Further, the first special winning opening shutter solenoid for driving the first winning opening shutter 36A is exclusively controlled. As a result, the first large winning opening shutter 36A is driven so as to change between an open state in which the game ball can be won in the first large winning opening 36 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. Will be done. The opening drive of the first big winning opening 36 by the first big winning opening shutter 36A may be exclusively controlled with the opening drive of the second big winning opening 37 in the big hit game state. That is, for example, in the 1st round, the 2nd prize opening 37 can be opened based on a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and during that time, the 1st prize opening 36 is continuously closed, and in the next 2R, the first prize opening 36 is continuously closed. The first big winning opening 36 can be opened based on a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and the second big winning opening 37 can be continuously closed during that time.

The second guide rail 30'is the same as the above-described embodiment, but has the following configuration. That is, the second guide rail 30'is not provided with a convex portion that can come into contact with the game ball. Therefore, the game ball flowing down through the second guide rail 30'is discharged from the lower end 30A'of the second guide rail 30' without decelerating the traveling speed. The lower end 30A'of the second guide rail 30'is located near the upper right side of the second big winning opening 37, and is curved so as to discharge the game ball substantially to the left. As a result, the game ball released from the lower end 30A'of the second guide rail 30'hits the right end portion of the second special winning opening shutter 37A, which will be described later, when the second major winning opening shutter 37A is in the closed state. At the beginning of contact, it rolls along the upper surface and moves to the left.

The second large winning opening shutter 37A is formed to have the same dimensions as those according to the first embodiment described above, but its upper surface has a relatively gentle downward-sloping inclined surface in the closed state. The upper surface 43a (not shown in FIG. 67) of the cover member 43 is connected to the left end of the second large winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state, and is an inclined surface having a downward-sloping tendency similar to that of the second large winning opening shutter 37A. It has become. The upper surface 43a has an effect of decelerating a plurality of game balls that have moved along the upper surface of the second large winning opening shutter 37A. That is, on the upper surface of the second special winning opening shutter 37A and the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43, the speed at which the game ball advances to the left is effectively reduced by making the inclined surface downward to the right, and these upper surfaces. All the game balls that proceed along the line initially proceed to the left, but turn to the right in the middle, and are guided outward from the right end of the second prize opening shutter 37A. An out opening 41A is provided on the lower right side of the second large winning opening shutter 37A. As a result, the game ball guided outward from the right end of the second winning opening shutter 37A is collected through the out opening 41. Although not particularly shown, the cover member 43 is provided with a front end guide portion 43b and a plurality of convex portions 43d, whereby the traveling speed of the game ball is effectively reduced. The upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 and the second large winning opening shutter 37A form the suppressing portion 430. Regarding the second prize opening shutter and the cover member, among the game balls traveling along these, some of the game balls are guided outward from the right end of the large winning opening shutter, while the remaining games. The inclination angle of the upper surface may be set to an appropriate angle so that the sphere is guided outward from the left end of the upper surface of the cover member.

[Effect of the game machine of the second modification]
According to the game machine of such a second modification, when the second large winning opening shutter 37A is in the closed state, the game balls are likely to cause congestion on the upper surface thereof, and more game balls are inserted into the second large winning opening. Since it can be retained on the upper surface of the shutter 37A, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for over-winning while making the player interested in the whereabouts of the game ball.

Further, according to the game machine of the second modification, the round game in which there is a possibility of over-winning and the round game in which there is no possibility of over-winning are opened in the second large winning opening 37 or the first. It can be easily recognized only by checking the large winning opening 36. In short, for example, in the first half round of the 1st to 7th rounds, opening and closing only the first big winning opening 36 makes it difficult to over-win, while in the second half round of the 8th to 16th rounds, only the second big winning opening 37 is opened and closed. It is possible to make it possible to win an over prize. In such a case, in the big hit game state, the time when the first big winning opening shutter 36A is in the open state and over winning is difficult and the time when the second big winning opening shutter 37A is in the open state and over winning is possible. Since it can be clearly distinguished, for example, in the first half of the jackpot game state, it is possible to concentrate on the production display of the additional bonus, while in the second half of the jackpot game state, over-winning is generated to further enhance the interest of the game. Can be enhanced.

<Third variant of the variable winning device>
Next, a third modification of the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 79. The same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the following description, unless otherwise specified, the form when the large winning opening is closed is referred to. The variable winning device according to the third modification can also be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 and the game board 1 shown in FIG. 67.

As shown in FIGS. 68 to 79, in the third modification, the variable winning device 90 is different from the above-described embodiment and modification. The variable winning device 90 includes a cover member 91 and an opening / closing unit 92 as basic components. The opening / closing unit 92 includes a front base plate 920, a back base member 921, a main stage 922, an upper stage 923, an upper lid 924, a drive unit 925, and the like. On the front portion 922a of the main stage 922, a shutter surface 922b that tends to downward slightly to the left is formed as a portion corresponding to the large winning opening shutter. The front base plate 920, the front portion 922a and the shutter surface 922b of the main stage 922 are located on the front side of the game board 1, while the back base member 921, the other part of the main stage 922, the upper stage 923, and the upper lid 924 are one. The unit and the drive unit 925 are arranged on the back surface side of the game board 1.

The cover member 91 has a front end guide portion 91b and a plurality of convex portions 91d, as in the case of the first embodiment, while having a right upper surface 91a and an upper left surface 91a'on the upper right and left sides. An opening 91c serving as a big winning opening 37 is formed between the right upper surface 91a and the upper left surface 91a'. Since the introduction portion 920c, which will be described later, is located above the right upper surface 91a, the game ball B hardly comes into contact with the upper surface 91a.

The front base plate 920 is provided in the penetrating portion 1c provided in the game board 1 so as to reach the back surface of the game area 1p. The front base plate 920 has an opening 920a in the center, and the front portion 922a of the main stage 922 is exposed through the opening 920a and the penetrating portion 1c. Further, at the center of the right end of the opening 920a, a game ball B guided forward along the staircase surface 922c of the main stage 922, which will be described later, is placed on the closed shutter surface 922b or on the open winning opening 37. A discharge unit 920b that can discharge is provided. An introduction portion 920c for guiding the flowing game ball B to the taxiway 924b of the upper lid 924, which will be described later, is provided at the upper right end of the opening 920a. Such a front base plate 920 also serves as an accessory part of the game board 1.

As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the back base member 921 is for supporting the main stage 922, the upper stage 923, and the drive unit 925 on the back side of the game board 1. A main stage 922 is supported on the upper portion of the back base member 921 so as to be tiltable in the front-rear direction via a first shaft 921a along the left-right direction, and a second shaft located above this and along the left-right direction. The upper stage 923 is supported so as to be tiltable in the front-rear direction via the 921b. The shaft 921a is provided so as to be displaceable by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the main stage 922 is displaced so that the shutter surface 922b is displaced from the position where the large winning opening 37 is closed to the position where it is opened. When tilted, the shaft 921a is displaced from the high position to the low position accordingly. A drive unit 925 is arranged at the bottom of the back base member 921. Further, on the left side surface portion of the back base member 921, a collection port 921c capable of collecting the game ball B guided forward along the staircase surface 922c of the main stage 922 described later is provided (see FIG. 75). ). Such a back base member 921 also serves as an accessory part of the game board 1.

The main stage 922 has a front portion 922a, a shutter surface 922b, and a staircase surface 922c. An upright front portion 922a is formed at the front end of the staircase surface 922c so as to face the cover member 91, a shutter surface 922b is formed on the front portion 922a, and a plurality of pieces capable of contacting the game ball B. The convex portions 922d of the above are provided at predetermined intervals. The staircase surface 922c is formed in a plurality of steps so as to have a step that becomes lower from the rear to the front. The staircase surface 922c of each step is an inclined surface that tends to descend slightly forward, and is also an inclined surface that alternately descends to the right, decreases to the left, and decreases to the right as it progresses from the upper stage to the middle stage to the lower stage. According to such a staircase surface 922c, a passage is formed in which the game ball B meanders to the left and right and leads from the upper stage to the lower stage through the middle stage. When the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the game ball B that has reached the lower stage of the staircase surface 922c is guided onto the shutter surface 922b through the discharge portion 920b and is directly collected through the collection port 921c. A plurality of convex portions 922e that can come into contact with the game ball B are also provided at predetermined intervals on the stepped portion of the staircase surface 922c of each step. As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, such a main stage 922 can be tilted in the front-rear direction by the drive unit 925. That is, as shown in FIG. 77, when the main stage 922 is in an inclined posture with a downward slope, the staircase surface 922c is also in a relatively steep posture with a downward slope, and the front portion 922a and the shutter surface 922b are in an opening 920a. Move down. As a result, the gap between the upper end of the opening 920a and the front portion 922a is expanded, and the plurality of game balls B on the staircase surface 922c are all guided to the large winning opening 37 through this gap.

The upper stage 923 is adjacent to the upper part of the main stage 922, and has an upper surface 923a having a step higher than the uppermost staircase surface 922c in the main stage 922. The central portion of the upper surface 923a is lower than both end portions and is an inclined portion that descends forward, and the game ball B naturally moves to the staircase surface 922c through this portion. The game ball B is guided to the upper surface 923a of the upper stage 923 through the introduction portion 920c and the taxiway 924b of the upper lid 924 described later. When the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, a plurality of convex portions 923e that can come into contact with the game ball B are provided at predetermined intervals at the front end of the upper stage 923. As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, such an upper stage 923 can be tilted in the front-rear direction in conjunction with the main stage 922. That is, as shown in FIG. 77, when the upper stage 923 is in a forward-down inclined posture, the upper surface 923a is also in a relatively steep downward posture, and the plurality of game balls B on the upper surface 923a are simultaneously. It will be guided to the staircase surface 922c. The main stage and the upper stage may be integrally formed. Further, the main stage and the upper stage may overlap each other in the open state.

The upper lid 924 covers the staircase surface 922c and the upper stage 923 of the main stage 922, and has a taxiway 924b connected to the introduction portion 920c and an inner wall 924c extending in the left-right direction. The guideway 924b is formed so as to guide the game ball B from the introduction portion 920c to the upper surface 923a of the upper stage 923. The inner wall 924c is arranged so as to face each stepped surface with a space between the stepped surface of the main stage 922 and the stepped surface through which the game ball B can pass. Further, the inner wall 924c is provided with a plurality of convex portions 924e that can come into contact with the game ball B at predetermined intervals. Such inner wall 924c, convex portion 924e, staircase surface 922c, and convex portion 922e meander the game ball B to the left and right along the staircase surface 922c of each step, and suppress the progress of the game ball B as a passage. Part 930 is formed. Such an upper lid 924 also serves as an accessory part of the game board 1.

The drive unit 925 tilts the main stage 922, and mainly includes a drive motor 925a, a drive gear 925b, a pair of intermediate gears 925c and 925d, a pair of driven gears 925e and 925f, two push-up pipes 925g and 925h, and It has two rotation position sensors 925j and 925k. The driving force of the drive motor 925a is transmitted to the driven gear 925e via the drive gear 925b and the intermediate gears 925c and 925d, and further transmitted to the driven gear 925f meshed with the driven gear 925e. The drive motor 925a and the rotation position sensors 925j and 925k are connected to the main CPU 61 via a control circuit (not shown), and are controlled by the main CPU 61 or supply a predetermined signal.

Cylindrical peripheral walls are formed on the driven gears 925e and 925f, and inwardly projecting pieces 9250e abutting on the semi-spiral cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h formed on the push-up pipes 925g and 925h are formed on the peripheral walls. , 9250f are provided. Further, on the peripheral wall of one of the driven gears 925e, two outward projecting pieces 9251e and 9252e are provided so as to be detected by the rotation position sensors 925j and 925k at a predetermined rotation position. The push-up pipes 925g and 925h are interpolated into the driven gears 925e and 925f in a state of being constantly urged upward via springs 925m and 925n. A cam cover 925p is provided on the upper part of the push-up pipes 925g and 925h, and the cam cover 925p is always in contact with the lower part of the main stage 922. As shown by the solid line in FIG. 78, at the rotation position where the projecting piece 9251e is detected by the rotation position sensor 925k, the projecting pieces 9250e and 9250f come into contact with the uppermost portions of the cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h, and thus as shown in FIG. 77. , The push-up pipes 925g and 925h are maintained at a low position against the urging force of the springs 925m and 925n. As a result, the main stage 922 is in an inclined posture, and the large winning opening 37 is opened. On the other hand, when the driven gears 925e and 925f are rotated by approximately 180 degrees in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 78, the projecting piece 9252e comes to the rotation position detected by the rotation position sensor 925j as shown by a virtual line in the figure. In this state, the projecting pieces 9250e and 9250f come into contact with the lowermost portions of the cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h, so that the push-up pipes 925g and 925h are maintained at high positions as shown in FIG. 76. As a result, the main stage 922 is in a non-tilted posture, and the large winning opening 37 is closed. Further, when the large winning opening 37 is closed and then opened again, the driven gears 925e and 925f are rotated by approximately 180 degrees in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 78, so that the projecting pieces 9250e and 9250f are formed. It rotates while pushing down the cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h while abutting on the cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h. As a result, the state as shown in FIG. 77 is obtained again, and the large winning opening 37 is opened. That is, the main stage 922 is in an inclined posture and a non-inclined posture each time the driven gears 925e and 925f are rotated by approximately 180 degrees in one direction, and the large winning opening 37 is opened and closed accordingly.

[Effect of the game machine of the third modification]
According to the game machine of the third modification, the game ball B is guided to the restraining unit 930 to effectively control the traveling speed without operating a member other than the main stage 922. It is possible to decelerate and suppress, and as the shutter surface 922b is opened, a plurality of game balls B suppressed by the suppression unit 930 can be guided to the large winning opening 37 all at once. As a result, the number of passages of the game ball B to the large winning opening 37 can be adjusted without separately providing a storage device, etc., the increase in the number of parts and the cost increase can be suppressed, and the heat problem around the game board can be solved. can do.

Further, the game ball B rolling in the game area 1p is allowed to flow into the restraining portion 930 through the introduction portion 920c and the taxiway 924b without directly colliding with the shutter surface 922b, and in this restraining portion 930, with the upper side of the staircase surface 922c. Since the game ball B can be smoothly guided from the rear end portion to the front end portion on the lower stage side without any trouble, damage to the shutter surface 922b can be prevented.

Further, also on the staircase surface 922c of the suppressing portion 930, the traveling speed of the game ball B can be effectively decelerated / suppressed by the meandering passages and the convex portions 922e, 923e, 924e, and the progress can be further delayed. it can.

Further, since the game ball B can be guided from the game area 1p on the front surface side of the game board 1 to the suppression portion 930 on the back surface side, a sufficient distance for decelerating / suppressing the traveling speed of the game ball B is secured. be able to.

Further, in the suppressing portion 930, the plurality of convex portions 922e, 923e, 924e can form a passage capable of effectively suppressing the progress of the game ball B, and the staircase surface 922c, which tends to descend forward, can form a plurality of games. The balls B can be guided to the large winning opening 37 all at once, and over winning can be easily realized.

In addition, not all of the game balls B whose progress is suppressed by the suppression unit 930 are guided to the large winning opening 37, and a part of them is guided to the outside of the game area 1p through the collection opening 920c. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from passing excessively with respect to 37.

<Fourth modification of the variable winning device>
Next, a fourth modification of the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. The components that are the same as or similar to those according to the third modification described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. In the variable winning device according to the fourth modification, the main stage 922 is mainly different from that according to the third modification. The variable winning device according to the fourth modification can also be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 and the game board 1 shown in FIG. 67.

In the main stage 922 of the fourth modification, the shutter surface 922b is formed on the front portion 922a, but the convex portion is not provided. Of course, a convex portion may be provided. Further, the upper lid 924 and the stepped portion of the staircase surface 922c, which are not shown as a whole, are not provided with convex portions. The staircase surface 922c of each step is an inclined surface that tends to descend slightly forward, and is formed so as to exhibit an uneven or wavy repeating shape along the left-right direction. The upper surface 923a of the upper stage 923 is also formed to be uneven or wavy like the staircase surface 922c. According to such a staircase surface 922c and the upper surface 923a, when the game ball B advances from the upper stage to the lower stage, it is easy to swing in the left-right direction, so that the time to reach the lower stage is prolonged by that amount. The traveling speed of the game ball B can be slowed down more effectively.

As shown by a solid line in FIG. 82, when the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the game ball B that has reached the lower stage of the staircase surface 922c is guided onto the shutter surface 922b through a discharge portion 920b (not shown). An inclined support surface 922f is provided at the bottom of such a main stage 922, and a slide plate 926 capable of reciprocating in the front-rear direction is in contact with the inclined support surface 922f. The bottom of the main stage 922 is supported by the slide plate 926. The slide plate 926 is moved in the front-rear direction by a drive unit 925 (not shown).

That is, as shown by a virtual line in FIG. 82, when the slide plate 926 retracts to a predetermined position behind while being in contact with the inclined support surface 922f, the main stage 922 is in an inclined posture downward. Then, the staircase surface 922c also becomes a relatively steep posture that descends forward, and the front portion 922a and the shutter surface 922b move below the opening 920a (not shown). As a result, the plurality of game balls B on the stairs surface 922c are all guided to the large winning opening 37. As the mechanism for tilting the main stage, the same mechanism as the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above may be applied.

[Effect of the game machine of the 4th modification]
According to the gaming machine of the fourth modification, it is possible to configure a variable winning device capable of over-winning with simpler parts and structures, and it is possible to effectively suppress an increase in the number of parts and a manufacturing cost. it can.

<Other examples of the fourth modification>
Next, the variable winning apparatus according to another example of the fourth modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. The same or similar components as those according to the fourth modification described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. 83 is a plan view showing the main stage 922, FIG. 84 is a plan view showing the upper unit 924', and FIG. 85 is a view for schematically explaining the opening / closing operation of the main stage 922. .. 83 and 84 show a form in which the components (main stage 922, upper unit 924') of the variable winning device are provided in the penetrating portion 1c of the game board 1 without a gap. In reality, the components of the variable winning device are provided in the penetrating portion 1c of the game board 1 with a certain gap.

The main stage 922 shown in FIG. 83 is integrally formed with the upper stage. The main stage 922 is also formed in an uneven shape or a wavy shape along the left-right direction, and has a staircase surface 922c formed of an inclined surface that tends to descend slightly forward. A shutter surface 922b is integrally formed on the front end (front portion) 922a of the staircase surface 922c. The staircase surface 922c and the shutter surface 922b are formed so as to have the same dimensions in the left-right direction. The upper unit 924'shown in FIG. 84 is similar to the upper lid 924 described above, but does not have a plate-like member facing the entire surface of the staircase surface 922c in the closed state, and is rearward from the introduction portion 920c to the main stage 922. It has a taxiway 924b for guiding the game ball B to the upper stage of the staircase surface 922c by wrapping around the upper end. The rear end portion 924f of the taxiway 924b is arranged above the rear end of the main stage 922, and a communication space portion 924g leading to the rear end of the main stage 922 is opened further behind the rear end portion 924f. There is. As a result, the game ball B guided to the rear end portion 924f of the taxiway 924b falls to the rear end portion of the main stage 922 through the communication space portion 924g. Between the front end 922a of the staircase surface 922c and the upper end of the opening 920a (not shown), even when the main stage 922 is in the closed state as well as the open state, the game is played from the staircase surface 922c to the shutter surface 922b via the front end 922a. A relatively large gap through which the ball B can pass is provided. As a result, even when the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the game ball B can be smoothly guided from the staircase surface 922c of the suppression unit 930 to the shutter surface 922b without any trouble.

As shown in FIG. 85 (A), when the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the game ball B in the restraining unit 930 passes through the opening 920a (not shown) along the staircase surface 922c from the upper stage to the lower stage, and finally. It is guided onto the shutter surface 922b. Such a main stage 922 is tilted by a mechanism similar to that of the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above. As the device for tilting the main stage, for example, another drive unit using a solenoid may be used.

That is, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), when the main stage 922 is in a forward-down inclined posture, the staircase surface 922c is also in a forward-down inclined relatively steep posture, and the shutter surface 922b is an opening (not shown). It moves downward of 920a. As a result, the plurality of game balls B on the stairs surface 922c are all guided to the large winning opening 37. Even with such a variable winning device provided with the main stage 922 and the upper unit 924', the same effect as that of the fourth modification described above can be obtained.

<Fifth variant of variable winning device>
Next, a fifth modification of the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The components that are the same as or similar to those according to the third modification and the fourth modification described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. The variable winning device according to the fifth modification also has the main stage 922 mainly different from that according to the third modification. The variable winning device according to the fifth modification can also be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 and the game board 1 shown in FIG. 67.

The main stage 922 of the fifth modification is formed up to the portion of the upper stage, and has an inclined surface 922c'that tends to downward uniformly. Nothing is particularly provided on the inclined surface 922c'. The upper lid 924 has a plurality of partition walls 924c'on the surface facing the inclined surface 922c'. This cut wall 924c'turns left and right to meander when the game ball B moves from above to below along the inclined surface 922c' when the main stage 922 is in a posture of closing the large winning opening 37. The passage 930'is formed. The partition wall 924c'is provided with a plurality of convex portions 924e that can come into contact with the game ball B at predetermined intervals. When the game ball B moves downward along the inclined surface 922c'by the passage 930' having such a convex portion 924e, the suppressing portion for decelerating / suppressing the traveling speed by meandering left and right. Is formed. That is, even with the passage 930'bent to the left and right, the game ball B meanders to the left and right as it moves from the upper side to the lower side, so that the time required to reach the lower end of the inclined surface 922c' is prolonged by that amount. The traveling speed of B can be slowed down more effectively.

As shown by a solid line in FIG. 87, when the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the game ball B that has reached the lower end of the inclined surface 922c'is guided onto the shutter surface 922b through a discharge portion 920b (not shown). An inclined support surface 922f is also provided at the bottom of such a main stage 922, and a slide plate 926 capable of reciprocating in the front-rear direction is in contact with the inclined support surface 922f. The bottom of the main stage 922 is supported by the slide plate 926. The slide plate 926 is moved in the front-rear direction by a drive unit 925 (not shown).

That is, as shown by a virtual line in FIG. 87, when the slide plate 926 retracts to a predetermined position behind while being in contact with the inclined support surface 922f, the main stage 922 is in an inclined posture with the front lowered. Then, the front portion 922a and the shutter surface 922b move to the lower side of the opening 920a (not shown) while the inclined surface 922c'is in a steeper downward posture. At this time, the distance between the inclined surface 922c'and the partition wall 924c'is expanded to be larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and the partition wall 924c'cannot hinder the progress of the game ball B. As a result, the curved passage 930'is eliminated, and the plurality of game balls B on the inclined surface 922c' are promptly guided to the large winning opening 37 without any trouble.

[Effect of the game machine of the fifth modification]
Even with the gaming machine of the fifth modification, it is possible to configure a variable winning device capable of over-winning with simpler parts and structures, and it is possible to effectively suppress an increase in the number of parts and a manufacturing cost. ..

<Other examples of the fifth modification>
Next, the variable winning apparatus according to another example of the fifth modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90. The same or similar components as those according to the fifth modification described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. 88 is a plan view showing the main stage 922, FIG. 84 is a plan view showing the upper unit 924', and FIG. 85 is a view for schematically explaining the opening / closing operation of the main stage 922. .. 88 and 89 show a form in which the components (main stage 922, upper unit 924') of the variable winning device are provided in the penetrating portion 1c of the game board 1 without a gap. In reality, the components of the variable winning device are provided in the penetrating portion 1c of the game board 1 with a certain gap.

The main stage 922 shown in FIG. 88 is a member formed in a flat plate shape substantially in the same manner as in the fifth modification described above, and its upper surface is arranged as a front-down inclined surface 922c', and the inclined surface 922c' The tip portion is used as the shutter surface 922b. The upper unit 924'shown in FIG. 89 also does not have a plate-like member facing the entire surface of the inclined surface 922c', wraps around from the introduction portion 920c to the upper part of the rear end of the main stage 922, and is a suitable upper end portion of the inclined surface 922c'. It has a taxiway 924b for guiding the game ball B to. Further, the upper unit 924'has a plurality of partition walls 924c' at a portion facing the inclined surface 922c'. The cut wall 924c'forms a left-right curved passage 930' to meander as the game ball B moves from above to below along the inclined surface 922c'when the main stage 922 is closed. ing. The partition wall 924c'is provided with a plurality of convex portions 924e that can come into contact with the game ball B at predetermined intervals. Such a passage 930'forms a restraining portion that guides the game ball B downward along the inclined surface 922c' by meandering the game ball B to the left and right while decelerating and suppressing the traveling speed. Between the exit portion 930a'of the passage 930'and the upper end of the opening 920a (not shown), the main stage 922 is guided to the front end side of the inclined surface 922c'when not only in the open state but also in the closed state. A relatively large gap through which the game ball B can pass is provided. As a result, even when the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the game ball B can be smoothly guided from the inclined surface 922c'to the shutter surface 922b along the passage 930' without any trouble.

As shown in FIG. 90 (A), when the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the game ball B on the inclined surface 922c'moves in a meandering manner from the upper side to the lower side along the passage 930', and finally. It passes through an opening 920a (not shown) and is guided onto the shutter surface 922b. Such a main stage 922 is tilted by a mechanism similar to that of the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above. The rear end of the main stage 922 is supported via a shaft 921a inserted into the vertically elongated hole 921d of the back base member 921, and the main stage 922 can be tilted by rotating around the shaft 921a. As the device for tilting the main stage, for example, another drive unit using a solenoid may be used.

That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), when the central portion of the main stage 922 is lowered by the drive unit 925, the main stage 922 is relatively tilted around the shaft 921a displaced downward along the vertically elongated hole 921d. It becomes a steep downward slope. That is, the inclined surface 922c'is also in a posture that is steeper than the state shown in FIG. 90 (A), and the shutter surface 922b moves below the opening 920a (not shown). As a result, the plurality of game balls B on the inclined surface 922c'are separated from the partition wall 924c', and the passage 930'is eliminated. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B are simultaneously large along the inclined surface 922c'. You will be led to the winning opening 37. Even with such a variable winning device provided with the main stage 922 and the upper unit 924', the same effect as that of the fifth modification described above can be obtained.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment.

In the above embodiment, the large winning opening shutter or the shutter surface protrudes / retracts in the front-rear direction or tilts in the front-rear direction, but slides in the left-right direction to open / close the large winning opening, or around the vertical axis. The large winning opening can be opened and closed by turning, or the two large winning opening shutters can be arranged in parallel and the large winning opening can be opened and closed by increasing the distance between the two large winning opening shutters when opened. You may.

Further, the surface shape of the large winning opening shutter or the shutter surface may be a serrated rough surface, an uneven surface, a wavy surface, or a shape in which a plurality of convex portions are discretely arranged on the entire surface. According to this, the traveling speed of the game ball can be slowed down more effectively.

Further, in the above embodiment, the large winning opening has a characteristic configuration, but for example, the same as the above-mentioned large winning opening shutter or shutter surface is applied to the blade member as an ordinary electric accessory, and the opening is over. It may be possible to enable winning and corresponding control.

Regarding the traveling speed of the game ball expressed in the description of the above embodiment, "deceleration" means that the game ball also stops.

As another example of the third modification to the fifth modification, the entire area covered by the members (upper stage, main stage, etc.) constituting the stage may be used as a large winning opening.

When a plurality of large prize openings are provided, the specified number of prizes may be different for each large prize opening, or the number of prize balls may be different. For example, as another example of the second modification, for the first prize opening, the prescribed number of prizes per round is five, the number of prize balls per prize is five, and the like, and the second prize opening is set. The specified number of prizes per round may be 10 and the number of prize balls per prize may be 15.

When achieving a prize exceeding the specified number of prizes by the interpal during the round, for example, the following opening / closing pattern in which the estimated number of prizes at the time of opening at the first opening and the estimated number of winnings at the time of opening after closing during the round are changed. May be provided. Specifically, when the prescribed number of prizes per round is 10, the opening and closing pattern is such that the estimated number of prizes is 8 at the first opening and the estimated number of winnings is 4 at the later opening, and the first opening. An opening / closing pattern may be provided such that the estimated number of winnings is 6 at times and the estimated number of winnings is 6 at the time of opening later. According to such an opening / closing pattern, it is possible to realize specifications in which the number of over-winnings is the same but the process of over-winning itself is different.

In addition, the firing timing at which the most winning numbers can be expected may be notified each time when the large winning opening is closed before the round game is executed. As a result, even if the firing operation is stopped in the middle of the big hit game state, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the over-winning cannot be realized.

Further, regarding the notification of the planned grant quantity, when a plurality of large winning openings are opened in one big hit game state, the corresponding number may be notified for each large winning opening. For example, the total planned grant quantity is "2500", the planned number of prize balls based on the prize in the first prize opening is "1500", and the planned number of prize balls based on the prize in the second prize opening. When is "1000", the notification is performed so that the planned number of prize balls related to the first prize opening is displayed as "1500" and the planned number of prize balls related to the second prize opening is displayed as "1000". Can be done.

As a modification of the small hit probability, for example, one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may have a higher probability than the other. In this case, the one with the lower small hit probability shall include the one that does not win the small hit (winning probability 0%). In addition, for those who have a high probability of small hits, there is a possibility that they will not win small hits, and all but the big hits may be won. For example, when the update range of the hit determination random number value is 0 to 255, the big hit probability may be 1/256 and the small hit probability may be 255/256.

As a modification of the lottery related to the opening of the second starting port (lottery for a normal symbol game), the game ball is detected by the passing gate switch in either one or both of the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state. Even if it is done, it may be decided whether or not to open the game uniquely without drawing a lottery for the opening. For example, in the non-time-saving game state, the lottery may be set to non-open, and in the time-saving game state, the lottery may be set to open. In addition, when only one of the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state is a non-lottery, if the person corresponding to the non-lottery is in the non-time-saving game state, it will be opened by lottery in the time-saving game state. If the person who falls under the non-lottery is in the time-saving game state, the case where the lottery is not open in the non-time-saving game state may be provided. That is, it suffices that the time-saving game state has a relatively higher probability of being open than the non-time-saving game state. Further, regarding the opening pattern of the blade member, two or more types are provided, for example, 1 second x 1 opening, 2 seconds x 2 opening, etc., and even if the lottery related to opening is no lottery, a plurality of opening patterns can be used. A lottery may be conducted to determine which of the open patterns should be used.

When the above-mentioned modified example of the lottery relating to the small hit probability and the opening of the second starting port is applied to each of the above-described embodiments, for example, if the specified number of winnings in the small hit is two, before the large winning opening is opened. By the interval between rounds or the interval during the round between the opening of the big winning opening, it is possible to realize three or more over winnings exceeding the specified number of winnings even in a small hit. For example, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is 1/256, the small hit probability is 255/256, and in the non-time saving game state, the lottery is not open, while in the time saving game state, the lottery is not open. In this case, in the short-time game state, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by a small hit, and the game playability can be further developed. In addition, when the jackpot probability of the first special symbol is 1/256, the small hit probability is 1/256, and the probability of loss is 254/256, the interval between rounds before the opening of the big winning opening or the interval between the opening of the big winning opening Due to the interval during the round, it is possible to win 3 or more over prizes that exceed the specified number of prizes even for small hits that are infrequent.

As for the display related to the large winning opening shutter and winning, for example, by providing a ball detection sensor near the left end and the right end, the expected number of winnings per round and the actual number of winnings are notified by a bar graph-shaped meter display or numerical display. You may try to do it. For example, in a predetermined period until the big winning opening is opened, when a game ball is detected by the ball detection sensor on the right end side, the number of expected winnings is added and updated by the meter display or the numerical display, while the ball detection on the left end side is performed. When the game ball is detected by the sensor, the expected number of winnings is subtracted and updated by the meter display or numerical display, and when the big winning opening is opened, the finally updated numerical value is presented and according to the numerical value. For example, the display mode such as "maximum prize !!", "medium prize!", Or "small prize" may be produced.

A plurality of stage members (upper stage, main stage, etc.) may be provided in one large winning opening.

A specific area may be provided inside the large winning opening, and when the game ball passes through the specific area in the big hit game state, the game may shift to the probabilistic game state.

As a game machine, it can be applied to a pachislot machine, a roulette machine, or a gaming machine including a slot machine.

Needless to say, the above-described embodiments and modifications can be appropriately combined.

Based on the above embodiments or modifications, the basic configurations of the present invention are listed below.

(Appendix A1)
A game board (game board 1) having a game area (game area 1p) on which the game medium (game ball) can roll, and
A passing area (large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A displacement member (large winning opening shutter 37A, main stage 922) that can be displaced into a first mode (open state) in which the game medium can easily pass through the passing region and a second mode (closed state) in which the game medium is difficult to pass. And with
The displacement member has restraining portions (suppressing portions 430 and 930) capable of suppressing the traveling speed of the inflowing game medium.
The restraining part
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, it is located at the first position (open position) where the traveling speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member can be suppressed.
When the displacement member is in the first aspect, it is characterized in that it is located at a second position (closed position) in which the traveling speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is not suppressed as compared with the case where the displacement member is located at the first position. A game machine to play.
(Appendix A2)
The restraining portion includes a portion that becomes lower as the displacement member advances from one end to the other when the displacement member is in the second aspect, and also includes a support surface that supports the game medium from below (the large winning opening shutter 37A). It has an upper surface, a staircase surface 922c of the main stage 922, and an inclined surface 922c').
The passage region is formed at least below the other end of the support surface.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, wherein a taxiway (second guide rail 30', taxiway 924b) capable of guiding the game medium to one end of the support surface in the restraining portion is formed.
(Appendix A3)
The game board has a penetrating portion (penetrating portion 1c) that reaches from the gaming area to the back surface thereof.
The displacement member is arranged in the penetrating portion so that at least a part of the suppressing portion is located on the back surface side of the game area.
The game machine according to Appendix A1 or A2, which has an introduction unit (introduction unit 920c) for guiding the game medium in the game area to the suppression unit located on the back surface side of the game area.
(Appendix A4)
The restraining portion is formed in a concavo-convex shape along the first horizontal direction (horizontal direction), and is formed in a stepped shape along the second horizontal direction (front-back direction) intersecting the first horizontal direction. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to A3, which is characterized by being
(Appendix A5)
A launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium into the gaming area, and
In the game area, a start passage area (first start port 32, second start port 33) provided separately from the pass area and through which the game medium can pass,
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that the game medium has passed through the passing area.
A specific game state transition determination means (main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start passage area.
The specific game state control means (main CPU 61) capable of controlling to the specific game state, provided that the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means.
An advantageous game executing means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game or the like) that displaces the displacement member to the first aspect at least once in the specific game state is provided.
The advantageous game ends on the condition that the specified number of game media (specified number of winnings) has passed through the passing area.
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media into the displacement member.
In the advantageous game executing means, in the specific gaming state, the time (time of the interval between rounds) in which the displacement member is in the second mode before executing the advantageous game is set by the launching means for a specific number of game media. It can be controlled to have a specific time when it is fired and flows into the displacement member.
When the displacement member becomes the first aspect after the lapse of the specific time, the game medium flowing into the displacement member passes through the passing region, whereby the number of passages in the passing region in the advantageous game is defined. It can be more than a few,
In the specific game state, the number of game values given by the game value-giving means (number of prize balls) per game medium that has passed through the passing area, and the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game executing means. Based on the number of executions (number of rounds) and the planned number of passages of the game medium (estimated number of winnings) that can pass through the passage area according to the specific time, the planned number of game values to be granted in the specific game state (planned). The planned grant quantity determination means (sub CPU71) for determining the number of prize balls) and
The description according to any one of Supplementary A1 to A4, which comprises a notification means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of notifying at least a part of the planned grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means. Game machine.
(Appendix A6)
A launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium into the gaming area, and
In the game area, a start passage area (first start port 32, second start port 33) provided separately from the pass area and through which the game medium can pass,
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that the game medium has passed through the passing area.
A specific game state transition determination means (main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start passage area.
The specific game state control means (main CPU 61) capable of controlling to the specific game state, provided that the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means.
An advantageous game executing means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game or the like) that displaces the displacement member to the first aspect at least once in the specific game state is provided.
The advantageous game ends on the condition that the specified number of game media (specified number of winnings) has passed through the passing area.
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media into the displacement member.
The advantageous game executing means is the time required for the first number of game media, which is less than the specified number, to be launched by the launching means and pass through the second passing region during the execution of the advantageous game. After the displacement member is set to the first mode for the first time (the first opening time during the round), the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time (during the round) is the second mode. The interval time) can be controlled so that the sum of the first number and the second number of game media exceeding the specified number is the time when the second number of game media is launched by the launching means and flows into the displacement member.
When the displacement member becomes the first aspect after the lapse of the second time, the game medium flowing into the displacement member passes through the passing region, whereby the number of passages in the passing region in the advantageous game is described. It is possible to exceed the specified number,
In the specific game state, the number of game values given by the game value-giving means (number of prize balls) per game medium that has passed through the passing area, and the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game executing means. Based on the number of executions (number of rounds) and the planned number of passages of the game medium (estimated number of prizes) that can pass through the passage area according to the first time and the second time, the game value in the specific game state. The planned grant quantity determining means (sub CPU71) for determining the planned grant quantity (planned prize ball number) of
The description according to any one of Supplementary A1 to A4, which comprises a notification means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of notifying at least a part of the planned grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means. Game machine.

(Appendix B1)
A game board (game board 1) having a game area (game area 1p) on which the game medium (game ball) can roll, and
A passing area (large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A displacement member (main stage 922) that can be displaced into a first mode in which the game medium can easily pass through the passing region and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult to pass through.
When the displacement member is in the first aspect, it can be located at the first position with respect to the displacement member, and when the displacement member is in the second aspect, it is the first with respect to the displacement member. It is provided with a passage forming member (upper lid 924, upper unit 924') that can be located at two positions.
The passage forming member is
When it is located at the second position, it is possible to form a passage (passage 930) capable of suppressing the traveling speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member together with the displacement member.
When located at the first position, by not forming at least a part of the passage together with the displacement member, the traveling speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is not suppressed as compared with the case where the position is located at the second position. Is possible,
A gaming machine characterized in that when at least a part of the passage is not formed, the gaming medium flowing into the displacement member can be guided to the passing region.
(Appendix B2)
In the second aspect, the displacement member includes a portion that becomes lower as it progresses from one end to the other end, and also has a support surface (inclined surface 922c'of the main stage 922) that supports the game medium from below. Have and
The passage region is formed at least below the other end of the support surface.
The passage is formed by the support surface and the passage forming member.
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, the game medium can roll from one end to the other end of the support surface along the passage.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, wherein when the displacement member is in the first aspect, the gaming medium can roll from one end to the other of the support surface without following the passage. ..
(Appendix B3)
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, the game medium that rolls along the passage is provided with a discharge port (recovery port 921c) that can be discharged out of the passage before being guided to the passage region. The gaming machine according to Appendix B2, characterized in that.
(Appendix B4)
A launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium into the gaming area, and
In the game area, a start passage area (first start port 32, second start port 33) provided separately from the pass area and through which the game medium can pass,
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that the game medium has passed through the passing area.
A specific game state transition determination means (main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start passage area.
The specific game state control means (main CPU 61) capable of controlling to the specific game state, provided that the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means.
An advantageous game executing means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game or the like) that displaces the displacement member to the first aspect at least once in the specific game state is provided.
The advantageous game ends on the condition that the specified number of game media (specified number of winnings) has passed through the passing area.
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media into the displacement member.
In the advantageous game executing means, in the specific gaming state, the time (time of the interval between rounds) in which the displacement member is in the second mode before executing the advantageous game is set by the launching means for a specific number of game media. It can be controlled to have a specific time when it is fired and flows into the displacement member.
When the displacement member becomes the first aspect after the lapse of the specific time, the game medium flowing into the displacement member passes through the passing region, whereby the number of passages in the passing region in the advantageous game is defined. It can be more than a few,
In the specific game state, the number of game values given by the game value-giving means (number of prize balls) per game medium that has passed through the passing area, and the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game executing means. Based on the number of executions (number of rounds) and the planned number of passages (estimated prizes) of the game medium that can pass through the passage area according to the specific time, the planned number of game values to be granted in the specific game state (planned) The planned grant quantity determination means (sub CPU71) for determining the number of prize balls) and
The description according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B3, which comprises a notification means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of notifying at least a part of the planned grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means. Game machine.
(Appendix B5)
A launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium into the gaming area, and
In the game area, a start passage area (first start port 32, second start port 33) provided separately from the pass area and through which the game medium can pass,
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that the game medium has passed through the passing area.
A specific game state transition determination means (main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start passage area.
The specific game state control means (main CPU 61) capable of controlling to the specific game state, provided that the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means.
An advantageous game executing means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game or the like) that displaces the displacement member to the first aspect at least once in the specific game state is provided.
The advantageous game ends on the condition that the specified number of game media (specified number of winnings) has passed through the passing area.
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media into the displacement member.
The advantageous game executing means is the time required for the first number of game media, which is less than the specified number, to be launched by the launching means and pass through the second passing region during the execution of the advantageous game. After the displacement member is set to the first mode for the first time (the first opening time during the round), the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time (during the round) is the second mode. The interval time) can be controlled so that the sum of the first number and the second number of game media exceeding the specified number is the time when the second number of game media is launched by the launching means and flows into the displacement member.
When the displacement member becomes the first aspect after the lapse of the second time, the game medium flowing into the displacement member passes through the passing region, whereby the number of passages in the passing region in the advantageous game is described. It is possible to exceed the specified number,
In the specific game state, the number of game values given by the game value-giving means (number of prize balls) per game medium that has passed through the passing area, and the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game executing means. Based on the number of executions (number of rounds) and the planned number of passages of the game medium (estimated number of prizes) that can pass through the passage area according to the first time and the second time, the game value in the specific game state. The planned grant quantity determining means (sub CPU71) for determining the planned grant quantity (planned prize ball number) of
The description according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B3, which comprises a notification means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of notifying at least a part of the planned grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means. Game machine.

(Appendix C1)
A launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium (game ball) and
A game board (game board 1) having a game area (game area 1p) on which the game medium launched by the launch means can roll.
A first passage area (first start port 32, second start port 33) provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A second passing area (large winning opening 37, second large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that the game medium has passed through the second passing area, and
A displacement member (large winning opening shutter 37A, second) that can be displaced into a first mode (open state) in which the game medium can easily pass through the second pass region and a second mode (closed state) in which the game medium is difficult to pass. Grand prize opening shutter 37A) and
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, the traveling speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first aspect, the progress of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is suppressed. A restraining unit (suppressing unit 430) that does not suppress the speed as compared with the case where the displacement member is in the second aspect,
With the specific game state transition determination means (main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passage area. ,
The specific game state control means (main CPU 61) capable of controlling to the specific game state, provided that the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means.
An advantageous game executing means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game or the like) that displaces the displacement member to the first aspect at least once in the specific game state is provided.
The advantageous game ends on the condition that the specified number of game media (specified number of winnings) has passed through the second passing area.
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media into the displacement member.
In the specific game state, the advantageous game execution means has a specific time (inter-round interval time) in which the displacement member is in the second mode before executing the advantageous game, and the number of game media exceeds the specified number. The gaming machine is characterized in that it can be controlled so that it is time to be launched by the launching means and flow into the displacement member.
(Appendix C2)
A third passage area (first large winning opening 36) provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A variable member (first winning opening shutter 36A) that can be varied between the first mode in which the game medium is easily passed through the third passing region and the second mode in which the game medium is difficult to pass is provided.
The game value giving means can give a game value on condition that the game medium has passed through the third passing area.
The advantageous game execution means is
In the specific gaming state, a first advantageous game executing means capable of executing the first advantageous game that displaces the variable member to the first aspect at least once, and
In the specific gaming state, the second advantageous game executing means capable of executing the second advantageous game that displaces the displacement member to the first aspect at least once is included.
In the specific gaming state, after executing either one of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game, the other can be executed.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, wherein the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means ends on condition that a predetermined number of game media have passed through the third passing region.
(Appendix C3)
The specific gaming state is
The first specific game state in which the specific time is the first specific time before at least one advantageous game is executed, and
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, which includes a second specific gaming state in which the specific time is a second specific time longer than the first specific time before at least one advantageous game is executed.
(Appendix C4)
In the specific game state, the number of game values granted by the game value-giving means (number of prize balls) per game medium that has passed through the second passing region, and the advantageous game execution means are executed. The schedule of the game value in the specific game state is based on the number of times the advantageous game is executed (the number of rounds) and the planned number of passages of the game medium (estimated number of prizes) that can pass through the second passage area according to the specific time. A planned grant quantity determining means (sub CPU71) for determining the grant quantity (planned prize ball number), and
The gaming machine according to Appendix C3, comprising a notification means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of notifying at least a part of the planned grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means.

(Appendix D1)
A launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium (game ball) and
A game board (game board 1) having a game area (game area 1p) on which the game medium launched by the launch means can roll.
A first passage area (first start port 32, second start port 33) provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A second passing area (large winning opening 37, second large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that the game medium has passed through the second passing area, and
A displacement member (large winning opening shutter 37A, second) that can be displaced into a first mode (open state) in which the game medium can easily pass through the second pass region and a second mode (closed state) in which the game medium is difficult to pass. Grand prize opening shutter 37A) and
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, the traveling speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first aspect, the progress of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is suppressed. A restraining unit (suppressing unit 430) that does not suppress the speed as compared with the case where the displacement member is in the second aspect,
With the specific game state transition determination means (main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passage area. ,
The specific game state control means (main CPU 61) capable of controlling to the specific game state, provided that the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means.
An advantageous game executing means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game or the like) that displaces the displacement member to the first aspect at least once in the specific game state is provided.
The advantageous game ends on the condition that the specified number of game media (specified number of winnings) has passed through the second passing area.
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media into the displacement member.
The advantageous game executing means is the time required for the first number of game media, which is less than the specified number, to be launched by the launching means and pass through the second passing region during the execution of the advantageous game. After the displacement member is set to the first mode for the first time (the first opening time during the round), the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time (during the round) is the second mode. The interval time) can be controlled so that the sum of the first number and the second number of game media exceeding the specified number is the time when the second number of game media is launched by the launching means and flows into the displacement member. A game machine featuring.
(Appendix D2)
A third passage area (first large winning opening 36) provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A variable member (first winning opening shutter 36A) that can be varied between the first mode in which the game medium is easily passed through the third passing region and the second mode in which the game medium is difficult to pass is provided.
The game value giving means can give a game value on condition that the game medium has passed through the third passing area.
The advantageous game execution means is
In the specific gaming state, a first advantageous game executing means capable of executing the first advantageous game that displaces the variable member to the first aspect at least once, and
In the specific gaming state, the second advantageous game executing means capable of executing the second advantageous game that displaces the displacement member to the first aspect at least once is included.
In the specific gaming state, after executing either one of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game, the other can be executed.
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, wherein the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means ends on condition that a predetermined number of game media have passed through the third passing region.
(Appendix D3)
The specific gaming state is
The first specific game state in which the second time in at least one advantageous game is a predetermined time, and
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, wherein the second time in at least one advantageous game includes a second specific gaming state in which the second time is longer than the predetermined time.
(Appendix D4)
The specific gaming state is
In at least one advantageous game, after the displacement member is set to the first mode over the first time, the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time, which is the second mode, is set. It is possible to control the time during which the second number of game media is launched by the launching means and flows into the displacement member, and the displacement member before executing at least one advantageous game is the first displacement member. It is characterized by including a specific gaming state in which the time in the two modes can be controlled to be the time during which a number of game media exceeding the specified number is launched by the launching means and flows into the displacement member. The gaming machine according to Appendix D1 or D3.
(Appendix D5)
In the specific game state, the number of game values granted by the game value-giving means (number of prize balls) per game medium that has passed through the second passing region, and the advantageous game execution means are executed. The specific game is based on the number of times the advantageous game is executed (the number of rounds) and the planned number of passages of the game medium (estimated number of prizes) that can pass through the second passage area according to the first time and the second time. The planned grant quantity determining means (sub CPU71) for determining the planned grant quantity (planned prize ball number) of the game value in the state, and
The gaming machine according to Appendix D3, comprising a notification means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of notifying at least a part of the planned grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means.

(Appendix E1)
A launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium (game ball) and
A game board (game board 1) having a game area (game area 1p) on which the game medium launched by the launch means can roll.
A first passage area (first start port 32, second start port 33) provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A second passing area (large winning opening 37, second large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A game value-imparting means (payout device 83) capable of imparting a game value on condition that the game medium has passed through the second passage area.
A displacement member (large winning opening shutter 37A, second) that can be displaced into a first mode (open state) in which the game medium can easily pass through the second pass region and a second mode (closed state) in which the game medium is difficult to pass. Grand prize opening shutter 37A) and
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, the traveling speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first aspect, the progress of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is suppressed. A restraining unit (suppressing unit 430) that does not suppress the speed as compared with the case where the displacement member is in the second aspect,
With the specific game state transition determination means (main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passage area. ,
The specific game state control means (main CPU 61) capable of controlling to the specific game state, provided that the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means.
An advantageous game executing means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game or the like) that displaces the displacement member to the first aspect at least once in the specific game state is provided.
The advantageous game ends on the condition that the specified number of game media (specified number of winnings) has passed through the second passing area.
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media into the displacement member.
In the specific gaming state, the advantageous game executing means launches a specific number of game media into the displacement member during the time when the displacement member is in the second mode (time of the interval between rounds). It can be controlled so that it will flow in at a specific time,
When the displacement member becomes the first aspect after the lapse of the specific time, the game medium flowing into the displacement member passes through the second passage region, so that the game medium passes through the second passage region in the advantageous game. Regarding the number, it is possible to exceed the specified number,
In the specific game state, the number of game values granted by the game value-giving means (number of prize balls) per game medium that has passed through the second passing region, and the advantageous game execution means are executed. The schedule of the game value in the specific game state is based on the number of times the advantageous game is executed (the number of rounds) and the planned number of passages of the game medium (estimated number of prizes) that can pass through the second passage area according to the specific time. A planned grant quantity determining means (sub CPU71) for determining the grant quantity (planned prize ball number), and
A gaming machine including a notification means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of notifying at least a part of the planned grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means.
(Appendix E2)
A launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium (game ball) and
A game board (game board 1) having a game area (game area 1p) on which the game medium launched by the launch means can roll.
A first passage area (first start port 32, second start port 33) provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A second passing area (large winning opening 37, second large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A game value-imparting means (payout device 83) capable of imparting a game value on condition that the game medium has passed through the second passage area.
A displacement member (large winning opening shutter 37A, second) that can be displaced into a first mode (open state) in which the game medium can easily pass through the second pass region and a second mode (closed state) in which the game medium is difficult to pass. Grand prize opening shutter 37A) and
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, the traveling speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first aspect, the progress of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is suppressed. A restraining unit (suppressing unit 430) that does not suppress the speed as compared with the case where the displacement member is in the second aspect,
With the specific game state transition determination means (main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passage area. ,
The specific game state control means (main CPU 61) capable of controlling to the specific game state, provided that the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means.
An advantageous game executing means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game or the like) that displaces the displacement member to the first aspect at least once in the specific game state is provided.
The advantageous game ends on the condition that the specified number of game media (specified number of winnings) has passed through the second passing area.
When the displacement member is in the second aspect, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media into the displacement member.
The advantageous game executing means is the time required for the first number of game media, which is less than the specified number, to be launched by the launching means and pass through the second passing region during the execution of the advantageous game. After the displacement member is set to the first mode for the first time (the first opening time during the round), the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time (during the round) is the second mode. The interval time) can be controlled so that the sum of the first number and the second number of game media exceeding the specified number is the time when the second number of game media is launched by the launching means and flows into the displacement member.
When the displacement member becomes the first aspect after the lapse of the second time, the game medium flowing into the displacement member passes through the second passage region, so that the second passage region in the advantageous game The number of passages can exceed the specified number,
In the specific game state, the number of game values granted by the game value-imparting means and the number of times the advantageous game is executed by the advantageous game execution means per one of the game media that have passed through the second passing region. And, based on the planned number of passages of the game medium that can pass through the second passage region according to the first time and the second time, and the planned grant quantity that determines the planned grant quantity of the game value in the specific game state. Determining means and
A gaming machine comprising: a notification means capable of notifying at least a part of the planned grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means.
(Appendix E3)
A notification quantity changing means (sub CPU71) capable of changing the quantity notified by the notification means within the range of the scheduled grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means, and
With more
The gaming machine according to Appendix E1 or Appendix E2, wherein the notification means can notify a part of the planned grant quantity and then notify the quantity changed by the notification quantity changing means. ..
(Appendix E4)
A third passage area (first large winning opening 36) provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A variable member (first winning opening shutter 36A) that can be varied between the first mode in which the game medium is easily passed through the third passing region and the second mode in which the game medium is difficult to pass is provided.
The game value giving means can give a game value on condition that the game medium has passed through the third passing area.
The advantageous game execution means is
In the specific gaming state, a first advantageous game executing means capable of executing the first advantageous game that displaces the variable member to the first aspect at least once, and
In the specific gaming state, the second advantageous game executing means capable of executing the second advantageous game that displaces the displacement member to the first aspect at least once is included.
In the specific gaming state, after executing either one of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game, the other can be executed.
The first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means is terminated according to any one of the appendices E1 to E3, provided that a predetermined number of game media have passed through the third passing region. Described game machine.

1 Game board 1p Game area 4 Liquid crystal display device (notification means)
26 Launcher (launching means)
30'2nd guide rail (taxiway)
32 First start port (starting pass area, first pass area)
33 Second starting port (starting pass area, first pass area)
34 Blade member 35 Passing gate 36 1st prize opening (3rd passing area)
36A 1st prize opening shutter (variable member)
37 Grand Prize Opening, 2nd Grand Prize Opening (Passing Area, 2nd Passing Area)
37A Grand Prize Opening Shutter, 2nd Grand Prize Opening Shutter (Displacement Member)
41A Out port (exhaust port)
43 Cover member 61 Main CPU (specific game state transition determination means, specific game state control means, advantageous game execution means)
71 Sub CPU (Means for determining the planned grant quantity)
83 Payout device (means for giving game value)
430 Suppressor 90 Variable winning device 91 Cover member 920 Front base plate 920c Introduction part 921c Collection port (discharge port)
922 Main stage (displacement member)
922c Stair surface (support surface)
922c'Inclined surface (support surface)
924 Top lid (passage forming member)
924'Upper unit (passage forming member)
924b Taxiway 930 Suppressor 930'Passage

Claims (1)

Launch means that can launch game media,
A game board having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A passing area through which the game medium can pass and
A displacement member that can be displaced into the first mode in which the game medium can easily pass through the passing region and the second mode in which the game medium is difficult to pass through.
A game medium imparting means capable of imparting a game medium according to the passage of the game medium through the passing region,
A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player based on a predetermined condition, and
When the displacement member is displaced in the second aspect, a passage is formed which has an upper surface connected to one surface of the displacement member and forms a passage through which the game medium can pass by connecting the one surface and the upper surface. Parts and
When the displacement member is displaced in the second aspect, a restraining unit capable of suppressing the traveling speed of the game medium that has reached the passage is provided.
When the displacement member is displaced in the first aspect, the upper surface is not connected to the one surface and at least a part of the passage is not formed, so that the displacement member is displaced in the second aspect. However, it is possible not to suppress the progress speed of the game medium,
When the displacement member is displaced in the first aspect, the game medium can be guided to the passing region.
The specific game includes at least one advantageous game in which the displacement member is displaced to the first aspect.
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a predetermined number of game media have passed through the passing area.
The specific game execution means, in the specific game, the time that the displacement member is in the second aspect, a plurality of specific time to reach to the displacement member is fired a certain number of game media by said firing means It is possible to control the specific time from among the above , and during the plurality of specific times, when the displacement member changes from the second aspect to the first aspect in the specific game, a first number of games are played. A first specific time during which the medium can pass through the passing region and a second specific time during which a second number of gaming media different from the first number can pass through the passing region are included.
A gaming machine characterized in that the length of one surface of the displacement member is formed so that the specific number of gaming media can pass through at the same time.